likewise many Carpets called Alcatiffas but they are neyther so fine nor so good as those that are brought to Ormus out of Persia and an other sort of course Carpets that are called Banquays which are much like the striped Couerlits that are made in Scotland seruing to lay vpon chestes cubbords They make also faire couerlits which they call Godoriins Colchas which are very fair and pleasant to the eye stitched with silke and also of Cotton of all colours and stitchinges pauilions of diuers sorts and colours Persintos that are stringes or bands wherewith the Indians bind and make fast their bedsheddes thereon to lay their beds all kind of bedsteds stooles for Indian women and other such like stuffes costly wrought and couered with stuffes of all colours also fine playing tables and Chessebordes of Iuory and shields of Torteux shelles wrought and inlaide very workemanlike many fayre signets ringes and other curious worke of Iuorie and sea horse téeth as also of Amber whereof there is great quantitie They haue likewise a kind of mountain Christall wherof they make many signets buttons beades and diuers other deuises They haue diuers sorts of precious stones as Espinellē Rubies Granadis Iasnites Amatistes Chrysolites Olhos de gato which are Cattes eyes or Agats much Iasper stone which is called bloud and milke stone and other kindes of stones also many kindes of Drognes as Amfion or Opium Camfora Bangue and Sandale wood whereof when time serueth I will particularly discourse in setting down the spices and fruites of India Alluijn Cane Sugar and other merchandises which I cannot remember and it would be ouer long and tedious to rehearse them all Annell or Indigo groweth onely in Cambaia and is there prepared and made ready and from thence carried throughout the whole world whereof hereafter I will say more but this shall suffice for the description of Cambaia and now I will procéede At the ende of the countrey of Cambaia beginneth India the lands of Decam and Cuncam the coast that is the inwarde part thereof on the Indian side stretcheth from Cambaia to the coast of India where the said inward part hath the beginning which coast stretcheth Westwardes Southwest and by South to the Islande lying on the coast or entry of the said place called Insula das Vaquas being vnder 20. degrées vpon the which corner and countrey on the firme land standeth the towne and fortresse of Daman which is inhabited by the Portingalles and vnder their subiection distant from the Towne of Diu East and by South fortie miles The 10. Chapter Of the coast of India and the hauens and places lying vpon the same THe coast of India hath the beginning at the entry or turning of the lande of Cambaia from the Islande called Das Vaguas as it is saide before which is the right coast that in all the East Countries is called India but they haue other particular names as Mosambique Melinde Ormus Cambaia Choramandel Bengala Pegu Malacca c. as when time serueth shall be shewed whereof a part hath already béene described Now you must vnderstande that this coast of India beginneth at Daman or the Island Das Vaguas and stretcheth South and by East to the Cape of Comoriin where it endeth and is in all 180. miles vppon the which coast lie the towns and hauens hereafter following which the Portingals haue vnder their subiections and strong fortes therein first Daman from thence fiftéene miles vpwardes vnder 19. degrées and a halfe the towne of Basaiin from Basaiin ten miles vpwardes vnder 19. degrées the Towne and fort of Chaul from Chaul to Dabul are tenne miles and lyeth vnder 18. degrées from Dabul to the town and Island of Goa are 30. miles which lyeth vnder 15. degrées and a halfe all these Townes and fortes aforesaide are inhabited by the Portingalles except Dabul which they had and long since lost it againe The coast from Goa to Daman or the turning into Cambaia is called by those of Goa the Northerne coast and from Goa to the Cape de Comoriin it is called the southern coast but commonly the coast of Malabar Concerning the towne of Goa and the situation thereof as also the description of Decam Cuncam as touching their kings and progenies we will in another place particularly declare with many other memorable thinges as well of the Portingalles as of the naturall countrimen Wherefore for this time we will passe them ouer and speak of the other principal towns and hauens following along the coast You must vnderstand that all the townes aforesaid Daman Basaiin and Chaul haue good hauens where great traffique is done throughout all India all these townes and countries are very fruitfull of Ryce Pease and other graines Butter and oyle of Indian Nuttes but oyle of Oliues is not to be found in all the East Indies onely what is brought out of Portingall and other such like prouisions is there very plentifull they make also some Cotton linnen but very little The towne of Chaul hath great traffique to Ormus Cambaia to the redde sea to Sinde Masquate Bengala c. hath many rich Marchants and shippes there is a place by Chaul which is the old towne of the naturall borne countrymen where diuers kindes of silkes are wouen of all sortes and colours as Grogeran Sattin Taffata Sarscenet and such like stuffes in so great aboundance that India and all other places bordering the same are serued therewith whereby the inhabitantes of Chaul haue a great commoditie by bringing the raw silke out of China spinning and weauing it there and againe being wouen to carrie and distribute it throughout all India There are likewise made many and excellent faire deskes bedsteds stooles for women couered with stuffes of all colours and such like marchandises whereby they haue great traffique There is likewise great store of Ginger as also all the coast along but little estéemed there This land called the North part hath a very holesome and temperate ayre and is thought to be y e soundest healthsomest part of all India for the towne of Diu and the coast of Malabar is very vnholesome These Indians as also those of Cambaia which are called Benianen and Gusarrates and those of the lande that lyeth inwardes from Decam which dwell vpon the hill called Ballagatte which are named Decaniins and Canaras are altogether of yellowe colour and some of them somewhat whiter others somewhat browner but those that dwel on the sea coast are different and much blacker their statures visages and limmes are altogether like men of Europa and those of the coast of Malabar which stretcheth and beginneth 12. miles from Goa Southward and reacheth to the cape de Comoriin whose naturall borne people are called Malabaren which are those that dwell vpon the sea coast are as blacke as pitch with verie blacke and smoth haire yet of bodies lims and visages in all thinges proportioned like men of Europa These are the best soldiers
of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala and saw not one birde but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid then run no further North or North and by East vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼ vnder the which heights y e Islands As Ylhas Prinneras doe lie and somewhat more to the West for that holding your course Northeast the streame runneth so fast that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras trust not vnder that course for although you passe by them East Northeast yet it is false because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other till you come to a drie sand called A Coroa de Sanguase that is the Crowne of Sangase then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe but my opinion is if it be possible that it were better not to anker because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene if the water breake not vpon them The signes that are found within 14 miles from Mosambique is a great thicke land and a mile and a halfe from the coast lyeth a banke where you passe ouer with fifteene fadome water the land aforesaid is called Maginquale and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees like Pine-apple trees from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles and to Mocango 5. miles hauing all that way the aforesaid trees and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore Now to put into Mosambique you must take your course in the middle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera where you shal find 7.8 and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water and being as farre as the Iland so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George and that of Saint Iames are all one then you are right against the Islandes and from thence putting in you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio in the Iland of Mosambique vntil you be in a good depth which shal be a channel stretching North and South and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe then winde Northwarde alwaies keeping of the point called Noâ—â—a Senhora do Baluarte which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water without the fortresse of Mosambique and also from the sandes called Cabaciera which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro you must run northeast which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees 1 â— that is in the end of Southwest the course from this Island or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées and shall haue the wind Southeast and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south so you begin to come from India in the winter time from the Equinoctiall line or to the height of Coa that is vnder 15. degrées and 1 â— you must runne East Northeast and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa the signes you alwaies find in this way are alwaies about ten degrées in the night time you haue white and shining water and from those ten degrees to the coast of India sometimes you see many birdes that come from the shore that is from the coast of Arabia as Quartelles and other such like smal birds and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India then the Compasse beginneth to lessen in the Northwest for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest and 1 â— part and rather lesse then more The 6. Chapter To sayle from Goa to Cochin FRom Goa to Batecola you must saile two or three miles from the land from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep for it is deeper there then neerer to Cochin for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fadome deepe from thence it is good to runne Southeast and Southeast and by South to the fortresse of Barcelor and to know if you be by Barcelor or in the height thereof you must vnderstand that there are high hils which beginne at Batecola and continue to Barcelor and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde which standeth in the end of y e high hilles on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe about a mile and a halfe from the shore and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South southwest and somewhat more into the sea as the winde will permit you for there are other Islandes and cliffes being where you may passe by as I saide before at fourteen fadome water it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are nothing but Ilandes and cliffes which hauing past you come to see the Fort of Mangalor as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar which is â— miles let your course here be south southeast at 18. fadom deep from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles y e course is south southeast 18 fadome deepe from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles the course beeing south southeast and at twelue ten fadome deepe which is a good way The 17. Chapter The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall written by the said Rodriâ— de Ligos THe towne of Cochiin lieth vnder nine degrees and â— â— rather lesse than more and departing out of Cochiin towards Portingall you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come â— miles from Cochiin and being there you shall so set your course that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Maâ—ale you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes yet
hauen of Martauan there is a white houell or land that serueth for a marke hauing close by it two Palme trees and about two miles further you shall see a thicke top of lande vppon the end whereof towardes the sea lyeth an Iland which cannot be séen nor discerned from the land till you be right against it and that you haue discouered the Riuer within where the hauen of Martauan lyeth and being past this Iland you shall sée a white houel which lyeth likewise on the South side within the Iland there is a lake that hath good fish and before you come to the hauen comming from the Ilande of Comudo about a mile or a mile and a halfe to seawarde from the land you shall see a round Islande full of bushes called A Ilhas de Cebollas that is the Island of Onions by the which Island on the south side thereof there lyeth a cliffe whereon you sée the sea breake from this Island to the hauen of Martauan there are about two miles comming from Pulo Comudo you must put off from it towards the land holding your course as aforesaid as not hauing any cause of feare but onely of that which you sée before your eyes you must likewise vnderstande that from the Islande Das Cebollas forward towards the North there is no other Ilands nor cliffes which is a verie good marke of this creeke for that being on this side thereof you are no sooner past one Iland but you see another but from thence forward you see not any as I said before but you must bee sure not to passe beyond the hauen of Martauan for that being at twelue fadome not long after you should fal vpon the drought This hauen of Martauan is about a mile or a half and a half broad hauing on the North side a low flat land euen with the sea and is an Iland called Momua you may see it as you passe along the shore from Pulo Comuda towardes the hauen you must still keepe at twelue fadome and comming to 8. or 9. fadome then you shall anker for then you are in the hauen and put no neerer to the shore neither runne not further from the creeke to the banke for then you shall find lesse depth this riuer of Martauan runneth Northeast Southwest both out and in but you may not enter therein without a Pilot for that within the Riuer vpon the East side it hath a stone cliffe or rock which draweth the water vnto it therefore you cannot enter without a Pilot also in the entrie of this riuer and hauen on the right hand there lyeth a sandie banke where in the middle way there runneth a channell of sixe or seuen fadome deepe which you shal knowe by this that is in the deepest parte thereof it hath much fish which you may see and this hauen of Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrees and ◠4 and the towne of Martauan vnder sixteene degrees vpon the furthest end of the Iland of Andeman on the North side there lyeth two Ilands betweene the which and the Iland of Andeman you may safelie passe also on the furthest point of the South side of the Ilande of Andeman lying vnder 11. degrees there lyeth some Ilandes and from thence to the Ilandes of As Ilhas de Nicobar southwarde there reacheth an Iland also as you put off from the Ilandes of Andeman towardes the coast meeting with some gatheringes of water you neede not feare them for it is nothing but the water it selfe without any sands although there lyeth some vpon the coast there lyeth onely in the middle way an Ilande which the inhabitantes call Viacondam which is a small Iland hauing faire ground round about it but very little fresh water and nothing els but Pine trees wherefore you neede not go into it The 15. Chapter The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca HE that will saile to Malacca in the great Monson which is the principall time when the windes serue to go thether in the Month of Aprill then to make a good voyage you must set saile from Cochiin vppon the sixe and twentith of Aprill and being out of the hauen you must hold your course southward till you be vnder 7. degrées and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees and being vnder that height then you shall runne Southeast almost to fiue degrées and from thence East vntill you are past the Ilande of Seylon and being there you shall keepe on your course till you be vnder 5. and ⅓ and 5. degrees and ◠from thence you shall make towardes the Ilands of Gomespola which lie vnder 6. degrées by the point of Achiin in the Ilande Sumatra and comming to the Iland of Gomespola if you feare not the Acherins which are subiects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra and deadly enemies to the Portingals then take your course along by the Iland of Sumatra to the Cape called Taniamburo lying on the same coast of the Iland almost 30. miles from the Ilandes of Gomespola and from thence you shall take your course towardes the coast of Malacca running as farre to loofewarde as possible you may to discouer Pulo Sambilao which is an Ilande lying close vpon the coast vnder 4. degrées and ⅔ and distant from Malacca 40. miles Northwest and by North for that such as discouer and come to this Iland maketh a quicke voyage to Malacca and those that fall to leeward towardes Pulo Pinan which is an other Iland vnder fiue degrées and ½ lying with Pulo Sambilao North and by West 12. miles neere Pulo Batun there is another Iland lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles vnder 6. deg might peraduenture find Southeast windes which blow much on that coast therefore he that goeth late to saile hath a long voyage wherefore it is best to depart earlie from Cochiin to make a better voyage The 16. Chapter An other larger descriptiō of the course to saile from Goa in India to Malacca with the description of the coasts SVch as desire to saile from Goa or out of India to Malacca must put 20. miles into the sea that he may saile without y e Ilande of Seylon vnto the Ilandes called As Ilhas de Nicobar through the middle of the channell which lyeth vnder 7. degrees and ½ and in that countrey you must looke to the streame because with a west wind they run towards the Gulfe of Bengalen and with an East wind into the sea about 20. or 30. miles frō the Ilandes there is such a concourse breaking of water and streames as if there were sands Whē you com to y e middle of y e Ilands of Nicobar ther you find a channel lying vnder 6. degrees and ½ the Ilands being distant one from the other about a mile and a halfe where you may passe through without feare as hauing nothing to fear but y t you sée before you the depth you find there is 12.
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
southward and thē againe come Eastward out making the forme of an arme from the said point of Taniamburo to the mouth or entrie of this straight the course is 5. miles East West at 7. and 8. fadome déepe Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of y e month of Iuly he must go néere to the side of the great Iland Carymon because y e winds of the Monson of Iaua which are at y e time doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon and being past it you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you with y e marks aforesaid in this way you find manie depths passing along by Taniamburo thē the land of y e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other which is a common and certaine marke but hold you to loofeward the better to enter at your plesure This first straight at y e entry hath two riffs on each side one which come from the point or hooke of the land the land on the south side from the entry thereof is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward which make the straight to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10 9. fadom deepe and being so far in that the land on the South side which are Ilands make but one point then on the other side before you you shall see a hooke or point whereon there standeth a small red Houell which when you see then you shall turne from the right hand towards that smal Houell because it is the first Iland which you then haue past from that Iland forward there beginneth an other Iland between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe or Sand which with a low water is part vncouered reacheth into the middle of y e chanell where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand which will shew you where you are comming to the point aforesaid of the small Houell then put to the land on the right side which is Ilands as I saide before for it hath only betweene the Iland aforesaid the said Riffe and then you shall run Eastward about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome from thence forward y e row of Ilands whereby you sayle reach South Eastward and presently somewhat further on the right hand of the same Iland you shall see a round Iland running a little out from the other which will bee vpon your right hand by the which you shall passe along with good watch there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe muddie ground The land on the left hand which is the North side is Creeks and open ground and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you you shall kéepe from this North side which is nothing but Creekes for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes running as I said before along by the Ilands on the right hand comming by the aforesaid round Iland on the right hand at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe you shal sée a smal flat Iland with afew trées hauing a white sandystrand which lieth east and west with the mouth of y e straight of Sincapura which you shal make towards when you beginne to come néere it then the straight beginneth to open discouer it selfe you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow so to auoid the riffes shallowes of the North side as also not to fal towards y e south side of the mouth of the straight with the ride that runneth ther for you haue many depths and foule ground you must alwaies hold on y e North side where there is a sandie strand of the length of the shotte of a great péece at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground to Anker in if need be and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y e straight which you haue not passing further frō then◠for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground lying on the South side thereof as aforesaid once againe I aduise you not to passe frō the end of the strand to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes as aforesaide The mouth or entrie of this straight entreth betwéene two high hils being as broad as a man may cast a stone and reacheth Eastward is in length about the shot of a great péece y e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½ déepe in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe which sheweth like a Piller this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it the Varella of China on the South side a good way from the mouth therof it maketh a créeke in the midle wherof lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side the length of a small shot it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea making an Iland this opening is shallow all ouer seruing only for smal Foists to passe through in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is lieth a Cliffe or stonie place two fadome vnder water which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke as the point of the land reacheth and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell being past this Creek the land hath a hooke of a houell faling downward where the straight endeth in passing about this there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground when you haue past about it y e land from thence reacheth southeast on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end there are thrée Créeks whereof the two first are small the third great it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y e red Houel where the straight endeth this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered reacheth frō the one point to the other you must be carefull not to fall vpon it all that which lieth on the North side and without y e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground without danger In y e issuing of the straight beeing without it you haue two Riffes whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight about the shot of a great péece towards y e East cōming from the land on the north side
stretching southward the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight reaching Eastward so y t they make a crosse one throgh the other and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them the chanel y t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe the ground within y e chanel is muddie without sand This I haue particularly noted vnto you for their instructions y t hereafter shal passe through that way for that the discriptions of the Nauigation or course thereof heretofore written set downe are very short and obscure for such as haue not past through that way wherby many ships haue run on grounde stricken passed many dangers some cast away but returning to our matter and folowing y e course aforesaid whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side because of the sands aforesaid that lie within y e straights alwaies with your Lead in your hand looking rounde about you for y t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel it is 4. fadom and ½ also because it is so narrow y t you can hardly cast out your Lead me thinketh it is your surest way vpon each Sand to set a Scute or other mark that may serue you for Beakens so to auoide them and going a little further by the Creeke which hath the opening that commeth out of y e other side of the Sea wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water then kéepe presently towards the houel on y e right hand that maketh the point of the Creeke aforesaid wher also runing along by your Cōpasse as before by the land on the left hand somwhat neerer to it thē on the other side til you be out of y e straight alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side right against this Houel for it is ful of stones and Cliffs as I said before likewise you must shun the east side right against the issuing of the straight for that the shot of a great peece from thence it is altogether cliffes as aforesaid whē you are out of the straight desire to Anker then make towards the South side along by the land that you may get out of the streame you must Anker at 6. fadome for if you stay in the streame of the straight you may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y e ship or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand at this road you are right ouer against a strand where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth being out of the straight in manner as aforesaid you shal take your course along by the land vpon the right hand alwaies casting out the lead and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom neither to the land nor towards the sea and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes that stand at the end thereof and a sandie bay lying against the houel being half way frō the other houel which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay behind the which that opening which is in y e straight commeth out again then hold your course eastward at 4. fadome not turning to the one nor the other side for you should presentlie find both drougthes sands the channel is muddy ground and you must still haue the Leade in your hand vntill you finde other depth which wil not continue long and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel for it will shew you both the channels whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome thē beware of the south side vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome frō thence to dry lād for it is al riffes sand this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana which is the North syde and you run along east west it is in distance about 8 miles but you must not passe betwéen it the land the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire good ground at 15. fadom sandy groūd in the middle of this way from the straight to the Ilands or litle more or lesse lieth the riuer of Iantana which hath a great mouth the entry thereof being along the land on the east side where great shippes haue many times entred on the West side where there standeth a houell of red earth it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer reaching about half a mile into the sea vpon the which many ships haue fallen wherfore take héed of it from the point of the Iland abouesaid lying at the end of the land of Iantana there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea well 2. great miles and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it which is presently séen and discerned and when it is rough wether then the water breaketh all ouer betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell all stonie groūd and the shallowest place that I found therein was 5. fadome ½ and then to 7. fadome 1 ◠and then againe I found 6. or 8. fadome ½ and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece right ouer if you will passe this Channell you must runne half a myle of from the Iland come no néerer to it for if you should you would run on ground it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it vnlesse they were compelled thereunto as it happened to Francisco Dagmar that there ranne on ground and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe because he ranne to néer the Riffes and that the wind scanted two myles from these Ilandes Southsoutheast lyeth Pedra Branca that is White stone which is an Iland of white stone rockes and cliffes and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes on the South side thereof on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton which is verie long in the middle whereof there is a high houel wherevpon there is déepe ground but not good to anker for such as come from China round about Pedra Branca and close by it there are 6. fadome déepe good ground but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it I haue alreadie told you that in passing through the straight when you are ouer the sandes at 15 fadome in manner as aforesaid you must sayle Eastward towardes the Ilandes which you shall presentlie see as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana
and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha this créeke was called the Enseada or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie it hath much wood verie good to make ships of fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of water all sandie ground in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether and to Champello you runne Northwest This Iland of Champello hath a good road and safe harbour but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest and although the wind commeth from the land notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous which reach as the land doth till you bee vnder 17. degrees and run nearer to the northeast at the end whereof in the way to China there lieth 8. Islandes three great fiue small all full of trées and sandie strandes but without fresh water betwéene them round about it is altogether flat and foule way so that as soone as you let fall the anker the cable is presently fretted in péeces betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe This information was giuen me by certaine people of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme because they ankered and all their cables brake from the ground they saued themselues in the boate run through all those Islandes to find fresh water and could sée none you run from the hooke or point of those sandes to Pulo Caton Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by east and southwest and by west for they lie like a bow therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Caton running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles but returning againe to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton for that if you come thether early in the yeare you haue the west windes so strong that if you should be far from the coast they would carrie you by force vpon the sands without any remedie as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton and if you chance to be on the side of the land you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth betwéene the Firme land and the Iland which is two mile and a halfe broad all faire and good ground as I said before Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Aynon North and South and North by east and South and by West somewhat more then 50. mile This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées and ½ reacheth from the point aforesaid southwestward 12. or 13. miles and from the East side lyeth the way from China which you run Northeast and north east and by north to 19. degrees and ½ and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees and ½ from the Northeast side in such manner that the Iland is in forme foure square the channell betwéene it and the Firme land is in the narrowest part 6. miles where there lieth a hauen called Anchio hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe seuen miles eastward From Anchion lieth a créeke with good harbour and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land there lieth a great Riffe and sandes but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen called Taalhio at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland and from this high land aforesaid it runneth 12. miles northwestward and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side and inward hilles and houels from the end of the land Aynon on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓ to the Iland Pulo Gom in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north are 8. miles and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land it is a high land in forme like a Bell and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour wherein the ship Santa Crus lay from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes called Pulo Tio in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north being fiue miles Pulo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small seperated one from the other without any Trees from thence the Coast reacheth Northeast and Northeast and by North to the Enseada dos Ladroins that is the Creeke of Rouers from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea and vpon the east side therof about halfe a mile from it there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer whether many ships doe saile and put in a little further from this Iland lieth another Riuer wherein I haue béene which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China and with a southwest winde is discouered and threre also runneth strong streames the entrie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land it is faire and good ground and being about this point of land you shall run till you come to a sand bay where you shall anker for within it is shallow and sandie on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land and from these 2. riuers 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground The land of this creeke on the north northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile it is shallow but muddie ground you goe to the Hauen of Comhay whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come it is like a créeke that is very great hauing another point or end of high land which reacheth North and South and right ouer against this hauen on y e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it and is distant from the aforesaid point
about 4. miles you shall hold your course to the Hauen along by the Iland that lieth on the coast keeping to seaward or halfe a mile from it for it is all faire and good ground at 6 and 7. fadome deepe and so you shall runne along to the end therof and being there about a mile southeastward you shall sée a small Iland full of trees which you shall leaue on the southeast side running inward from it right to a high pointed hill that standeth within the land and when you begin to come néere it then you shall see the houses of the towne which lieth along by the strand and there you may anker at 4. and 3. fadome as you thinke good for it is all muddie ground and if you desire to runne into the Hauen through a Channell which passeth betweene the great Iland and the high land of Sunda you may well doe it alwaies running along by the land vntill you be by the Hauen for you shall leaue the Iland aforesaid and six Ilands more that are somewhat further to seaward but you finde but two fadome and ½ stonie ground wherefore the way passing about is the best as I said before The 26. Chapter The course from the Hauen of Bantam to the Hauen Calapa called Sunda Calapa both lying on the north side of the Iland Iaua Maior SAyling from the Hauen of Bantam to Sunda Calapa you should holde your course betweene the little Iland and the Iland lying right ouer against the crooked point because the streames runne towardes the Channell or straights sayling about the shot of a great peece from all the Ilands or along by them for it is all good way at fiue and sixe fadome deepe muddie ground because that froÌ„ the hooke of the bow or crooked point there runneth a great banke or sand and being about this hooke you shall run 6. or 7. fadome deepe till you be a good mile from it for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land it is altogether bankie shallow sandie ground and to seaward from this point lyeth a long Iland called Pulo Tunda and three or foure miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of Ilands both great and small which are al vnder the same course at the end of those Ilands which are foure one great and thrée smal they are ioyned together with Riffes and along by those Riffes you shall finde twentie foure twenty fiue fadome deepe and you shall leaue al those Ilandes standing on a row to seaward from you from the point aforesaid called the crooked hooke All the coast vnto Calapa runneth East and somewhat East and by south you runne along by it at 7. and 8. fadome for if you put further to seaward then the streames run too stiffe towards the straight or the channell that runneth outwardes betweene Iaua and Samatra which is against you and is of manie depthes â—oure miles froÌ„ the crooked hooke or point forward then the coast hath another point of land where right ouer against it about a mile to seaward from it there lieth a round Iland but you must not passe betweene it and the land for it is very shallow stonie ground only small fusts may passe through it but you shall runne about halfe a mile to seaward from it for it is all along nothing but stones a little mile beyond this Iland there is another Iland and then yet a little further close by there lyeth another little Iland from these two Ilandes a mile southeastward close by the land there lyeth two other Ilands betwéene the two first Ilands and these two Ilands there is a channell of 6. or 7. fadome deepe which passing through you shall runne nerest to the Ilands that lie most to seaward if you will not passe through then run about to seaward from them at 12.13 and 15. fadome déepe from this long Iland northward endeth the Ilands that lie to seaward hauing the Riffs as I said before and make a mouth or opening of a channel of a great mile long you shall here run nearest to the Ilandes that lye closest to the land for that running by to the Ilands that lie to seaward you shall presently sée the Riffes which with a low water are most part vncouered being past this long Iland the other that lieth the shot of a great péece from it as also the two that lie further forward the land of the coast that hath the point then somewhat beyond this point 4. other Ilands betwéene the which and the land you may by no meanes passe a small mile further eastward there lieth other 4. Ilands two and two together at the end whereof to seaward there is a white saÌ„d that alwaies lieth vncouered all these Islandes you shall leaue on your right hand on the land side and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand you shall sée two high hils within the land which lie east west one from the other at the foote of the east hill lieth the hauen of Calapa where you shall anker if you wil enter into the hauen being past the foresaid sands an Iland that lyeth from thence toward the land then there wil foure Ilandes lie southeastward from you which teach towards the land another close by he land then you shal take heed of a sand lying north east close by the hauen which you may alwaies see and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood you shal runne towardes these Islandes which lie to seaward from the hauen béeing day time to shunne the droughtes aforesaid The 27. Chapter The course from the Iland Pulo Timon to the Hauen of Sunda in the Iland of Iaua Maior FRom the Iland of Pulo Timon you run to the Iland of Binton to a point of land that from the same Iland runneth almost Eastward into the sea south Southeast and North Northwest and hard by this point lieth certaine Riffes of small rockes and cliffes and on the north side of this point it hath an opening or mouth wherein there lieth a great Iland with two hilles and a vallie in the middle and along by this point lesse then halfe a mile from the land there are eight fadome deepe of flatte and cleare sandy ground and hath no foulenes but the stone Cliffes Rockes that lie close by the land from this point aforesaid of the Iland of Binton to the Southeast point of the Iland Pulo Panion which hath an Iland lying to seaward from it you runne Southeast and Northwest Southeast and by east and Northwest and by West betweene this Iland Pulo Panion and the Iland of Binton lieth an opening which in the middle way hath two flat small Ilands full of trées and if you cannot passe Pulo Panion on the east side then you may passe inward betwéene it and the land it hath fiue and sixe fadome déepe good
ground and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you This Iland of Pulo Panion lieth close to the land of Binton and if you fortune to be so neare the land that you may not passe by it on the sea side then you must runne to the northwest point where there lieth a rouÌ„d Iland which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland not running betwéene it and the Iland but round about it close to the land for it is faire running so inward along by the Ilands as I said before on the southeast point of this Iland Panion there lieth many Ilands and Cliffes and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands towards the Iland of Linga which is a faire cleare way and sea and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland for it is good way from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe about the length of the shot of a great péece and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered yet you may sée the water breake vpon them which you must shun From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga lying close on the East side of the same Iland you shall holde your course South and South and by East and runne Southward outward alwaies along the Ilandes which shall lie Westward from you and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest which is almost of forme like the Iland das Iarras lying by Malacca and foure miles before you come at it you shall sée two other smal round Ilands lying along by the land and seperated from the rest but not far and when you are as farre as the first round Iland béeing cleare weather then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga lying West Southwestward from you aboue or beyond the Ilandes whereby you passe which are all low houels and vallies and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands comming about thrée miles beyond the round Island you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land which at the first sheweth like two Cliffes and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a créeke called a Enseada de Linga and when you are as farre as this small Island then West Northwestward you shall sée the high land of Linga which sheweth like two high rockes or hils seperated from each other and reach North and South that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares and Westward you shall sée another Land which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground to the point or end of these Islands and by it you shall haue twentie eight fadome and comming by this point where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you to goe to Pulo Pon which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles on the North side hauing two small Ilandes and when you are on the Northeast side it séemeth to be round with a sharpe hill in the middle and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle as in effect it is then you must runne South Southwest and being thrée or foure miles forward you shal sée the Iland of Pulo Pon lie before you in it you haue fresh water and round about it is fayre ground when you see it you shall make towards it on the West side and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep and being by it runne South and south and by East with the which course you shall sée the hill of Manopijn lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca where the straight of Palimbon beginneth and the seuen Ilands called Pulo Tayo shall lie southeastwarde from you which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom then you are on the East side and hauing ten fadome then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca and finding 8. fadome you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra and as soone as you sée Manopijn then runne within two miles thereof before you enter into the straight or channell in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra shunning a great créek lying Northwest froÌ„ y e mouthes of PalimboÌ„ vpon y e same coast of Sumatra which hath a verie great hauen and entrie whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein it hath no shallowes and presently as you passe along the coast you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe The 28. Chapter The course along the coast of Sumatra fâ—oÌ„ the outside beginning at the fâ—rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees on the North side of the Equinoctiall to the straight of Sunda and so to the Islande Iaua Maior with the situation of the coasts BEing by the furthest point or ende of the Island of Sumatra on the out side then you must runne south along the coast it is a very high and pleasant country to behold with many great créekes and Bayes along by the coast From this first further point called Achein 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea the coast runneth South and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde that is the sandes of Trystan de Tayde you must runne along the coast Southeast and southeast and by south the course is fiftie miles by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde there are many sandes and shallows that lie round about them on the west Northwest and North sides with many Ilandes and Cliffes on the same sides these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the Ilandes of Pulo Sambilon lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro that is the gold Ilandes whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea they lie vnder two degrées and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda hauing many Ilandes all along as you passe as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe on the southside of the Equinoctiall East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra called Cabo das Correntes that is the point of the streame because
there the streame runneth very strong towardes the Southwest wherefore there is no other remedy then onely to runne close by the shore if you desire to goe to the straight of Sunda you must be verie careful for there are so many Ilandes along by the coast that they are not to be numbred from the Iland of Tristan de Tayde to the Ilandes of Manancabo are about 100. miles and your course is Northwest and southeast somewhat Northwest and by North and southeast and by south you must run between the Ilandes As Ilhas d'Ouro and the lande by which course you shall come to the poynt O Cabo das Correntes which is verie high running into the sea further then all the rest of the land but you must not go too neere to the point for there are certaine sandes and cliffes sticking out from it this point lyeth vnder one degrée and â…” on the South side of the Equinoctiall I set down no other marke to know the countrie of Sumatra because the streames draue to seaward without all these Ilands so I could not take a better course then to put to the Iland called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo that is the golde Iland of Manancabo and I fel on it vpon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. daies along by it it is a verie high and faire Iland to behold so that you may easily iudge well perceyue that it hath Gold it is altogether of a smooth stéepe grounde along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length you run by it North south and somewhat north and bâ— West and south and by East it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Ilandes about a myle and a halfe distant from the land vnder thrée degrees which is the height that I found but they are distant from the firme lande of Sumatra 8. or 9. myles the Riuer of Manancabo lying on the land of Sumatra right ouer against this countrie I think it to be a verie great riuer for from thence there runneth a great streame and much wood and other trash driueth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea The best marke we found vpon this coast of Sumatra was that we neuer left the sight of land but ran along by it for by that course you come to the Iland Ilha de Ouro scarce to 3. and 3. degrées and ½ I write this because you shall not trust to the running of the streame that draweth Southwestward as I said before from the Iland Ilha de Ouro you run to the straight of Sâ—nda southeast and Southeast and by south and being past Ilha de Ouro there lyeth two Ilandes which reach North and south one from the other in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles nowe to runne to the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda you must not leaue the coast of the firme land hauing good respect to the Ilandes and cliffes whereof there are very many lying by it that you can hardly know where to find y e mouth of the straight but onely by the knowledge of the Islande which is very high lying right ouer against a point of the Iland of Sumatra on the north side this firme land of Sumatra endeth there where with the Iland of Iaua Maior it maketh the straight it hath on the Northwest side of this straight two or thrée Ilands lying about a mile from the land and vpon the Ilandes that lie néerest to the lande there was once a shippe taken with French men the great shotte being kept by the kinges of the Islande of Banda and Calâ—pa and aâ— mile southwarde from the lande lyeth the Iland that hath a high sharpe pointed hill as I saide before and on the North side of this high sharp hil or Iland are 4. Ilands whereof one is verie high reaching Northeast and southwest they lie somewhat further from it that is by the aforesaid Ilands close by the point on the Northeast side betweene al these Ilands the land there is a great créeke of manâ— hidden cliffes lying vnder the water whereof some are vncouered and thinke not to enter into this créeke vnlesse it be with a Fuste or a very small ship for it is better to runne towardes the Iland lying on the south side thereof along by the point which you neede not feare for it hath nothing that can hurt you and then you shall presently sée lying before you on the Northeast side a poynt of lande which sheweth to haue 2. or 3. Ilands at the end thereof along by this point lyeth the mouth or entrie of the straight of Sunda where you must passe through this point reacheth North and south hauing in the North a high houell the south side being the ende of the same land close by the mouth of the straight for a better marke Northeastward from you you sée a long Iland and on the southeast part a high land which land lyeth aboue Bantam a hauen in the Ilande of Iaua where the Portingalles lade Pepper which groweth is gathered in that Ilande and behind the aforesaide high lande lyeth the towne of Bantam and before you come to the said land that lyeth aboue Bantam you shall in the East Northeast perceiue two or thrée Ilands and if you desire to go to Bantam you may passe betweene these Ilands but I once againe aduise you of the Iland lying in the mouth or channell or straight of Sunda aforesaide which is for a marke of the said straight being very high and deepe withall and hath this token that when you are past or about the first point or hooke you may then anker at 20. and 25. fadome deepe as you haue occasion vnlesse it be close to the land where there lyeth many white stones and rockes and further to seawarde it is altogether muddie grounde at 20. and 25. fadome but it is best for you to anker as neere the lande as you may for your best securitie for there are many stiffe blastes that come out of the land this high Island or poynted hill lyeth vnder fiue degrees and ½ for there I haue often taken the height of the sunne as I lay at anker and the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda lyeth vnder y e same height to sea warde you haue these Ilandes as you passe to the mouth or entry of the straight the first Ilandes lying West to seaward from the aforesaid pointed high hill or Iland and West Southwest or seuen miles from thence there is a rowe of Ilandes with certaine Cliffes lying about them and Southward other sixe or seuen miles there lyeth other high and great Ilands and also Southwestward from thence there are other Ilandes betweene all these Ilandes there are many channelles which are so narrow that men can hardly get out of them the best channell to runne through I founde by the aforesaide high pointed
vnder 29. degrées and ◠accounting for one mealetide thirtéene miles so that I gessed as then to be 25. myles from China On Sonday after noone we held our course in the same sort East and East and by South for all that euening and the night following till the next day at noone with a still winde and water and had no Sunne to take the height but I made my account of eightéen miles for a meale tide at halfe a strike to the East and East and by North the wind being scant South From Monday at noon we still had a calme South wind which continued so that euening and all night and about Tuesday morning the wind was somwhat fuller till noone whē I tooke the height of the Sunne and found vs to be vnder 29. degrees and ¾ running East and East and by South for the space of 22. miles From Tuesday at noone being vnder the height aforesaid I willed them to saile east hauing the same wind but somewhat calmer all that night to Wednesday at noone and then we began to sée driuing in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones hauing sayled fiftéene myles making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma hauing neither Sunne nor Starres to take the heights From Wednesday at noone the wind began to blow somwhat full South Southwest and because it was signified vnto me that the streames in that countrey ranne towardes the Island of Lequeo and perceiuing likewise in some places a certaine yellowe skumme driuing vpon the water which appeared vnto vs like ripe Limons I willed them presently to holde East Northeast and about euening wée sawe many signes of land as péeces of réedes risen and such like things At night I badde them runne East and East and by North but the first watch béeing done when the Chinish Pilot should watch his course hée had gone a great way out of the course hauing runne Eastward till the morning when againe I willed them to sayle East and by North the winde béeing as it was till Thursday at ten of the clocke and then although it was darke and close weather wee beganne to sée a land that séemed verie cloudie and couered with dampie mistes lying Southeast from vs and were about thrée myles from it Along by the same lande there lay two Islandes wée holding our course in the same sort vntill by the first land Eastward wee sawe another great high and long lande and at the end of the aforesaid high land Eastward wée sawe two other Islandes whereof the one was verie great stretching Northeast and Southwest and the other close by it stretching North and South being the smallest with many pointes On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence there are fiue small Islands or stonie Cliffes vpon a rowe from the first Island that we sawe which is the last Island of those that are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters lying on the Northeast side to the aforesaid small Island with many pointes it may be about sixe myles Eastward as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stonie Cliffes it might bée about fiue houres after noone hauing run as we thought since wee had sight of land about twentie and foure miles The Thursday aforesaid in the morning wée tooke the height of the North Starre being vnder thirtie degrees and ⅙ Comming within two myles of the Island that wée saw first of the Islands of stonie Cliffes wee ranne Northeast and Northeast and by East and when wee were right against it whereby it laie Southward from vs béeing about thrée myles from it on the North side thereof wée sawe another great high and long Iland with many trees which as wée learned is called Icoo it reacheth East and West and wée were about three miles from it but by reason of the darke weather and mistes wee could not discerne it and comming somewhat néerer to it wée sawe another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Iland beeing lesse than the other and because wée were by the aforesaid West point betweene both wee were fully determined to runne through the channell that shewed betweene the said two Islandes but because there was no man in the shippe that had any knowledge thereof fearing Riffes and shallowes wee durst not aduenture but wound vp to the East point to passe by the winde about the high Island running as much as wée might with a Southerly winde hauing great waues that put vs to the lande and so wee sayled East Southeast hauing yet about two myles to passe by the Island but night came on beeing verie darke so that wee could discerne no land although wee were close by it and to keepe from it wee ranne the same course till about one of the clocke after midnight then the moone shined yet wée could not see the Island but made Northward towardes it with fewe Sailes to the Island of Tanaxuma which according to my account should lie right before vs wherewith wée passed ouer the rest of the night till the morning when we sawe the Island Tanaxuma that laye right before vs beeing about two myles from it it beeing verie cloudie and wée made Northward towardes it to passe by the West side thereof but wée could not doe it by reason that the winde was Southwest and wee were by the South point thereof running along by the East side about halfe a mile from it This Island reacheth North and South beeing long and lowe ground hauing white sandie strandes with a verie gréene countrey of valleyes it hath many Pine trees but they stand scattering from each other and verie open it is about seuen or eight myles long hauing in the middle way on the East side close by the land an Island or stonie Cliffe which farre off sheweth like a Foist vnder Saile This Island lyeth vnder thirtie degrees and ½ right in the middle it is all saire and cleare ground From this Island of Tanaxuma Northwarde wée sawe a verie great and high lande reaching East and West about eight miles making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast and Northeast and by North from Tanaxuma an opening which is the mouth of the creeke called Xabuxij This Créeke hath for a marke that the lande on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hooke or point of the Creeke beeing a flatte ground and on the West side the land is as high as the first that wee sawe lying North and South with Tanaxuma This coast aforesaid may lie distāt ouerthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about seuen or eight myles From the North point of this Island wee made towardes the Créeke and béeing in the middle of our way the wind fell West Southwest whereby wee were enforced to lye by it the weather béeing calme so that the water that with the flood ranne Eastward draue vs off that wée could hardly get the Hauen but the ebbe that
after ranne very stiffe into it made vs get in and with the glimsing of the euening and the light Moone wée entred into a verie great goulfe wherein lay the aforesaide Créeke on the North side and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trées lying about the shot of a base from the land Eastward from this Island the land hath a high houell and on the South side of the said houell there lyeth a great opening which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trées There is the Hauen called Minatto which is a riuer better than that of Batecola lying in the coast of Malabar On the North side of this houell about a small myle there is another opening béeing in a land that is somewhat lower as the houell with some trées This opening right in the middle hath an Island wherein is the place of Xibuxij which is a great village full of people and is a riuer of fresh water but it is shallowe for you can not put into it without a spring tide From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West all lowe land and sandie strandes for the space of two miles from thence it runneth Southward againe till it butteth vpon a high hill which is that which wée sawe comming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foote of the hill there lyeth a small riuer very shallow From this riuer the land runneth East againe to the mouth thereof which may bée about halfe a myle broad The ground of all this Créeke and entrie is sand and bad anker ground All this high land aforesaid is called Quimonsiquy From this Créeke of Xibuxij seuen myles East Northeast lyeth the Créeke of Tanora which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon you runne the coast East and East by North in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bay which at the first shewe séemeth to haue a good harbor but when you are right against it then you may verie well perceiue it for it hath many stonie Cliffes and Rockes and runneth somewhat to landward I heare set downe the description of this Créeke that no man should deceiue himselfe therby that desireth to goe vnto Tanora as wée should haue done Béeing past this small Créeke you shall presently sée that the land maketh an end or point of high lande from the which point forward the coast windeth inward where you shall sée a sandie strand with two Ilandes full of trées lying along by it At the end of these Islands you shall sée other smaller Islands that lye off from the land inward to the Sea with other great stones and rockes Within these Ilands and Stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into this Hauen you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea and béeing past them then on the Northeast side to Seaward there will lie a stonie Cliffe with an Island without bushes or trées béeing stéepe land reaching North and South betwéene this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anker for right ouer against it it is 25 fadome déepe but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the point and the end of the aforesaid Islands and Stones that sticke outward to Sea then you shall presently passe along thereby inward towards the land which you may freely doe without danger for it is faire and cléere holding your course Westward and a point of land will be vpon your right hand and béeing past this point you shall passe close by shunning the land on the West side and being there you are within the Hauen which is a long Créeke or Bay reaching North till you be in you may ancre in the middle thereof at foure fadome déepe and then you are inclosed with a round bowe it is there altogither muddy ground Departing from Tanora to Fyunga the coast runneth North to a point of land lying about fiue myles from Tanora betwéene this point of land and Tanora there lyeth two Hauens the one called Gico not farre from Tanora the other further forward by some stonie Cliffes and Islands called Vmbra These two Hauens are good harbors for East winds that blowe much on this coast from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga may be fiue miles more from whence the coast land doe turne in againe like a Créeke comming somewhat further Northward out this Créeke is a low land along by the Sea coast with sandy strands and a mile beyond y e aforesaid point of land the coast hath an opening and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round trée close by the Sea side here is a good Hauen which is called Vndo and further forward there lyeth another Hauen called Toconosuchy this land is higher then the other hauen on the Southside it hath some high and great Trées and on the Northside a low land the which farre off outward sheweth like small Islands with trees This hauen is not good to put in A mile beyond this hauen there is another Hauen called Myme which is a good hauen for small shippes to enter and hath two enteries which you presently sée béeing without and may well discerne them in the middle hauing a flat Island full of Trees these Trees make two openings and you may see ouer the Island on the land which is higher a great gréene trée the land on the South side hath a high land with a valey From this Hauen about two myles and a halfe lieth another small Island called Tomxyma beyond this Riuer a myle and a halfe endeth the low land and then again it beginneth to be high from thence two myles further the land maketh a point or hooke of high land and a farre off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ramos lying on y e coast of India by Goa Sailing about this point hard by there is a Riuer Northward called Camyco which is two fadome deepe in the Hauen this is the furthest land of the kingdome of Fiunga From y e point of land aforesaid fiue miles distant from Tanora to this point of Camico the lande is like a Créeke or breech the water therein making a crosse streame for along by the land the Water runneth alwaies Southward you runne this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South and North and by east and South and by West and are about eight miles distant along by this Bréech you may anker at twelue and fiftéene fadome deepe faire sandy ground From this point called Cabo de Camico forward the coast runneth north northwest and when you are right against this point then you shall presently sée Northeastward and Northeast and by East the land of Toca which is an island and is about fortie myles long and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South it hath
on the North side with the land of Iapon a straight or narrow passage which runneth to the Hauen of Saquay and the land of Miaco and from the side of the Island along by it there are many small Islands The course you must hold through this straight to the Hauen of Saquay or Sacay is altogether along the coast and the land of Iapon which hath many and good Hauens At the end of this straight both these lands haue each of them a point of land sticking out being from the one to the other about a mile by the point of the land of Toca it is banky ground and all the people of this land on the North side are not in any sort to bée trusted Likewise you may passe from the South side of this Island Toca to the land of Myaco where all along it is good sayling and there are very good Hauens The first hauen whereof lyeth on the first point of land on the West side of the Island which close by it hath certaine Islands and Cliffes this Hauen is called Focora it hath a good harbour for all windes but not for Rouers for there they haue many Foistes wherewith they roue and steale At the East end of this Island Toca lying with the land of Iapon right ouer against it there is another straight or passage like that on the West side where you runne to the Hauen and Town of Sacay In the middle way from the aforesaied East side of Toca lyeth a Hauen called Aâ—â— which is inhaâ—â—ted by a very fierce and stout people There is alwaies a great army of Foistes prepared for the warres wherewith they robbe and spoyle all the Coast along The Shippes and Foistes that desire to passe through it asking leaue they may passe without let or hinderance On the East side aforesaid the land of Iapon reacheth much southward making a hooke or end called Cumano and the coast that reacheth thether is called Bandol It hath some Hauens that were inhabited by very rich and mightie people but they are neither secure nor free The Hauen of Sacay lyeth from the booke or end of the Island of Toca Northeast about nine or tenne myles This Hauen of Sacay with a West wind is harborlesse which make many great tides and hath a shallow sandie ground For the which cause the Ships that come laden thether are presentlie vnladen and the people leape on land leauing the Shippe fast bound and sometimes draw it on land From the point O Cabo de Camico fiue myles to a point of land you runne along the coast North Northwest and in the way you haue foure or fiue Islands and cliffes along the coast and right ouer against the aforesaid point there lyeth two other Islands close by the land hauing betwéene them both a smal channel and close by both on the North and south-side sides there are many Islands and Cliffes both great and small These two Islands with the Islands and Cliffes lye East and West with the Hooke and the end of Toca vnder thrée and thirty degrées and 1 â— All this coast is high land with the Islands lying along by it and hath sixtie and seuentie fadome déepe close by the land From thence forward beginneth the straight or passage to be narrow betwéene this Island of Toca and the land of Bungo and if in this countrey you haue néede to anker then put to the land of Toca where you shall finde muddye ground When you are about the aforesaid point of two Islands then the land beginneth Westward to turne in all high land hauing within close on the South-side a small Island you must take héed of this Créeke that the streames drawe you not in being past this Créeke you shall in the middle way of the channell in the straight sée right before you a smal round Island which shall lye on the East side from you and along by the coast fiue miles you shall sée another Island lying hard by the land which to sea ward from it hath many stony cliffes and Rockes By this Island Northeastward about a myle and a halfe there lyeth two other Islands Beyond these two Islands another myle and a halfe lyeth another long Island with a flat plaine or field on the top thereof reaching Northwest and southeast the Southeast and thereof being the highest Within this Island towards the West lyeth the Creeke of Vsquy where the king of Bungo holdeth Court If you desire to put in there you shall runne towards the first Island kéeping from the aforesaid Island and the Islands and Cliffes lying by it holding your course through betweene it and the other two Islands that lye further forward being passed in by this Island and the Islands and stony Cliffes you shall see Westward within the Créeke a great round and a high Island full of Trées wherevnto you shall runne alwaies kéeping néerer the two Islands then the Island of stony Cliffes for by the Iland of Stony Cliffes you haue seuentie fadome déepe and within the two Islands Westward you finde but 25 fadome muddy ground holding your course in that manner to the aforesaid Islands that lye in the Créeke kéeping on the North side for there it is faire and cléere and being right against this Island you shall find twenty fadome déepe where you shall anker that from them you may sée the hauens which are two the one lying a smal mile from this Island towards the Southwest by a point of land whereon there standeth sixe or seuen trées seperated one from y e other with some bushes you must put to this point which within it hath a small Bay or Créeke at the end whereof standeth a riffe of stone reaching from thence into the Sea in the which lyeth the aforesaid small Créeke which hath a very good harbour at thrée fadome déepe good and fair ground where you shall anker but it is not for great shippes The other Hauen is Northwestward on the other side of the Créeke hauing in it some Islands and stones it is a great Bay which runneth inward to the land making a bow with very good harbor This hauen is for great ships From this Créeke of Vsquy somewhat further Northward lyeth another great Creeke which runneth inwards West Northwest The Land and the point betwéene these two Créekes may bee from the one Sea to the other about the length of the shot of a great Péece in breadth and halfe a myle from the end of the point Westward on the South side lyeth a small Island close by the Land betwéene the which and the land runneth a channell of twelue fadome deepe with faire ground of great sand where I haue ankered Right ouer against this Island on the Northwest Land about the length of the shotte of a great Péece lyeth a small Creeke with a village called Sanganaxeque where Don Francesco Mascharenhas lay with his shippe for the monson This hauen with a northwest wind is harbourlesse From this Créeke
about halfe a myle forward you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast By all this coast and the low land it is all bankey grounds wherfore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle In the middle way of this lowe land there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow whereby you may not enter into them by any meanes and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie being sandy ground Close by the Roade or entry of this Riuer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo where the Kings in time past held their Courts where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it who are very rich and aboundant in wealth are resident From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen with harbour against all windes it is a small Bay for the points or heights therof doe runne through each other wherefore they make a good defence against the South windes The entry of this hauen is faire you need but run in through the middle of the Channell where you haue foure and a halfe and fiue fadome deepe and there you haue great furtherance for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson to vnderstand it well you must know that all this Countrey as also all China Malacca India and all the orientall places doe sayle with the coniunction of the windes which for certaine months together blowe out of one place as now in the North then in the South and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling which coniunction is called as in other places I haue said the Monson as Monson of the South winde that is when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Windes in like sort wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens Creekes Riuers Bayes and Islands where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe which is to bée vnderstoode that if they bée against you in the way you should hold you should know which hauen is good to stay in for that time or to winter in for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is against you so that you cannot holde on your voyage and of force you must stay for the wind and weather that is the Monson which serueth you and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue and then to follow on your voyage Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes that first set downe noted and obserued these courses and Nauigations vsing here the same manner and description of the countrey not chaunging the word of Monson although that in some places before I haue saied some thing thereof But to the matter you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy but it is not free from Rouers and theeues From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse-waies In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land but it is bad ground and there it is not good to stay for the windes for there you could not saue any thing From this point you may see the East land and at the end where this great Creeke endeth it is low land which is called Mâ—ryee and is all along faire and cleare The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and â— From this point or end of Mâ—ryee two myles further there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South it is a low land with sandie strands at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast and a myle beyond it there is a Village called Tamboca and another myle further lyeth another place called Tambico lying both on the Sea side but they haue no Hauens with harbours also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted Beeing right against this point of Land you shall along the coast see a long Island which a farre off sheweth like two Islands lying distant from the land about two myles it is called Fimexima betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo to this Island aforesaid All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground Riffes Stones and other filth All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo to this Island you must runne on the East side along by the land of Tocaa From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid nine myles Northward there is a very high Lande which reacheth East and West that is the land of Amanguchen a great mighty and rich country for therein is one of the mines of siluer of the countrey of Iapon In this coast are good Hauens as also the Island of Meagima which in times past before the Portingales trauelled to Iapon had great Trafficke for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon for all kindes of wares and Marchandises Along by this land of Amaguchen and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda of the which as also the other places thereabouts I will speake in another place together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof To sayle from the point of Moryee in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique lying in the country of Amanguchen which is very sure and good for all winds and of great Trafficke you shall holde your course Northeast and Northeast and by East being about sixtéene myles This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high and you runne all the aforesaid coast along to a Hooke or point of Lande East and West and East and by North and West and by South and from the Hauen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles whereof seuentéene and ½ make a degrée as all the myles in this description likewise doe in the which coast lyeth the Hauens hereafter following that is from Caminaxique to Toraque are about two myles and â— from Toraque to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles From Anooxyma to Toumoo are also fiue miles
Islands and great Rockes reaching from the land to seaward Within these Islands and stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into it you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land When you are right against the end thereof then Northeastward from you to Sea-ward there will lye another Island or stony Cliffe You shall runne within this Island and betwéene it and the Land there is a great Créeke where you may anker at fiue and twenty fadome déepe if néed be but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the Islands and stones that lye outward to Sea then you shall presentlie runne along betwéene a point of Lande Northward on the right hand and the Islands into the Hauen that you shall sée lye open without feare and being about this point of land you shall presently sée a Creeke stretching Northward inwards and then you shall put to that point of land which will bée on your right hand where you may fréely enter for it is foure fadome déepe all muddy ground and anker by the East land shunning the West From this Créeke of Tanora forward you runne Northward along the coast which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo all faire and cleare ground hauing nothing thereon to feare then that you see before your eyes and eightéene myles further you shall find a very great Island that will bee on the East side from you which is the land of Toca and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South about fortie myles long comming out by Sacay and Miaco The Southside of this Island is faire and cleare along the which you runne to Sacay betweene this Island and the coast of Bungo on the West side thereof there is a straight or passage of foure fiue or more myles broad and such as will goe to Bungo must alwaies kéepe along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga shunning the coast of Toca But returning to the coast of fiue and twenty degrées ½ beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno as aforesaid If you desire to saile to the Island Firando you shall runne from thence in the aforesaid course of Northeast and Northeast and by east to eight and twenty degrées and ¼ and being there kéepe Northeast by the which course you shall see two small long bare and broken Islands lying North and South with each other on the South side hauing two Islands or cliffes halfe a mile distant froÌ„ each other These two Islands aforesaid lye vnder one and thirtie degrées and ¼ Thrée or foure miles Northeastward from these Islandes lyeth an Island or stony Cliffe clouen in the middle hauing vpon it foure or fiue sharpe points or toppes when you are right against the aforesaid Island then you are yet tenne myles from the coast of Iapon Westward and running the same coast Northeastward you shall goe right vpon a very great high Island called Coiaquijn which lyeth East and West with the hauen of Angone being three or foure myles distant from the coast of thrée or foure myles long on the East side towards the Land it hath manie Islands and stony Cliffes If you chance to fall within the Island finding your selfe by the coast of Iapon whereby you cannot passe without the Island then take your course inward betwéene the Land and the Island without all the Islands and Stones about the length of the shotte of a great Peece from it but goe not neare the coast for that from the North Land there is a Point that reacheth to the other side Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffes as I said before you shall presentlie put along by the Island outward to Sea-ward whereby Northward you shall sée the Point of Lande aforesaid which hath some Cliffes and Riffes within the which Northward lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa This point of land lieth right ouer against another point of lande that sticketh out from the Island lying North and South with each other and when you haue past beyond this point of lande then you shall hold along the coast about a mile from it You runne along by this coast from the one point of lande to the other North Northwest and South Southeast and if you passe without the Island of Coiaquin you shall take the same way béeing past and about it to come vnto the coast and so runne along by it as aforesaid From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffes and Riffes thrée or foure miles forward there is another great and high point of lande in the same coast and beeing past it you shall sée a great opening or entrie of a Channell which is called O estrechio d'Arima that is the Straight of Arima within this straight lyeth two good Hauens the first called Xiquij which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon This Hauen lyeth about halfe a mile from the entrie inwarde on the South side and the right hand Westward at the end of a great Créeke which hath a harbour for all windes with foure or fiue fadome déepe muddie ground but in this Hauen three or foure Portingales were slaine I thinke it happened by their filthie pride and presumptuousnesse for in all places they will be Lordes and masters to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants which in all places will not be endured namely in Iapon being a stubborne and obstinate people But to to the matter On the North side of this créeke on the land lying on the other side there lieth a high round Island and hitherto it is all ouer faire and cléere sea and ground To put into Arima you shall goe towards the North Lande for on the South side as soone as you are past the Creeke of Xiquij you haue two stones and thereabouts it is all ouer full of riffes and other filth This straight aforesaid as you first enter into it reacheth Eastward and then turneth Northwarde and along by the point where it turneth northward there runneth strong streames and so stiffe that if you be not carefull it will turne the shippe about and put it backe againe if you haue not a stiffe forewind to breake the force of the streames Being about this point aforesaid on the same land there lieth a very good Hauen called Cochinochy or Cochinâ—quyn and then the Hauen of Arima whereof the Straight receiueth the name and lyeth halfe a mile Northward from Cochinochy beeing a Creeke which is open for an East wind and without any defence for foule weather Somewhat further lyeth the Hauen of Simonbaia that hath thrée Islandes which make a harbour against the North wind but at low water the shippes lie drie In this Straight there are no other Hauens that are safe and good for All windes but onely Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before From this Straight to the Island of Firando along the coast there are many
by the Island of Firando which is on your West side and is a verie great and long Island and sheweth on that side whereunto you saile with a great high Houell in the middle way vpon a point sticking out of the same Island when you are close by the same Island you shall runne along by it where you shall find an opening stretching inwards like a riuer you shall passe about a mile beyond it where you shall haue a small Créeke or Bay called Cochyn wherein you shall enter vntill you finde twelue fadome deepe and there anker and although there you lie open to the South winde yet the water goeth whole beeing there you shall send either by water or by lande to the towne where the Hauen is for certaine Foists or Barkes that may bring you into the Hauen which Hauen lyeth somewhat further for the entrie thereof is something dangerous because of the great streames that haue their Current therein If you desire to saile into this Hauen when it is almost high water haue care for the wind is strong at your entring and when the water beginneth to ebbe then it helpeth to bring you in then you shall runne in such maner along by the Island as I said before and being past the créeke of Cochyn to the first point of lande that you shall come vnto that sticketh out from the same Island from the which point Northward there iutteth two stonie Cliffes you shall goe neare the stonie Cliffes the better to get into the Hauen and you shall presently sée before you on the side of Firando a great and high Island full of trées when you sée it take your course right vpon the West point of the same Island vntill the saide Island lyeth wholly vncouered to Leeward from you whereby presently you shall sée inwarde the point or end of the towne and when you beginne to see the houses then put somewhat neerer to it right ouer against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hande and there the Island hath a small loâ— poinâ— of lande comming from a high hâ—uâ—â— and stretcheth into the Sea from the which point there runneth a Sand or Banke therefore you shall put towardes the side of the houses or end of the towne to kâ—pe out of the streame and when you are out being in calme water if the winde be not good then anker and from thence be rowed in either with Foists Barks or your own boat West West Southwest into the Hauen All this description and course of Nauigation is in breefe to conclude that when you come to the coast of Iapon you shall leaue all the Islandes that lie along vpon the coast on the East side and vpon the right hand and runne without them and the Islandes lying to Seaward from thence whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row called Saquyn and the long Island Caroxyma that lyeth further forwarde which reach North and North and by West from the ende of the rowe and the two small Islandes with two other small Islandes or Cliffes lying further forward and are seuen in all leauing them all on the left hand or the West side with the which course you shall goe directly vpon the Island of Firando as is before mentioned The 33. Chapter A voiage made by a Portingale Pilot with a Soma that is a Chinish shippe from Macau or out of China to the Island of Iapon and the countrey of Bungo with the scituations of the places along the course THe ninetéenth of Iune béeing Saterday we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the issue or chanel of Macau running outward to sea putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca doe vsually enter but because we could not get aboue the Island called A Ilha grande dos Ladronis that is the great Island of théeues lying four miles East Southeast to Seaward from the Islande and the Hauen of Macau therefore wée ranne to Leeward thereof About the length of the shot of a base from it there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other with a very small channell running betweene them thorough the which they passed with Bankoâ— or Chinish Barkes From thence about halfe a mile Northward lieth another long Island full of trees and bushes and when you put in there on the West Southwest side in the middle of the channell there lieth a stone which is couered with the Sea Sixe miles East Southeastward from these Islandes lyeth the Island of Tonquian which is a high and long Island full of trees and bushes and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islandes or Cliffes and because wee could not take the height to passe betweene the Islandes and the Cliffes which is a faire good channell wée passed to Leeward between it and another Island about a small mile Northward from thence which is a great Iland and there lie two Ilands or cliffes the greater hard by it and the other further off which we left on the left hande running along by the Island of Tonquian where it is all fair ground Which Island on the point that lyeth East Northeast on the land side hath a sandie Bay which is a very good Rode for the Monson of the South windes When wee were out beyond that Island then wee helde our course East Southeast vntill wee were as farre to Seaward as the furthest Island and being in sight thereof wee tooke our course East and east and by North for threescore miles till wee were vnder the height of the Island Lamon which course we helde thereby to shunne Rouers and Theeues who at that time and in those countries were continually risident making warre against the Portingales of Macau and yet wee had the firme Land still in sight I meane the toppes of the Trees and Bushes that stoode vpon the lowe flatte Lande and comming to the coast of Lamon although wee sawe it not wee presently ranne Northeast by the which course wee had the sight of the high lande of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China and beeing there wee found much badde water and hard streames and at the last wee espied the Varella or stonie Rocke that standeth aboue the Hauen of China seeing nothing else but high hilles and from thence forwarde wee sawe no more of the coast of China and running in that course of Northeast which from Lamon wee alwaies held wée perceiued the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or Small Lequeo which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau for wée espied it on Wednesday in the morning and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China beeing on the Southwest point thereof This Island Lequeo Pequeno stretcheth Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South it is a very high Island and about fifteene or sixteene miles long the furthest point
or end Northeastward of the same Island lyeth full vnder 29. degrees ½ for there I tooke the height of the Sunne with calme weather being about fiue or sixe myles from it and from this Northeast point the coast of the Island runneth Southeast at the end thereoâ— hauing another great and high Island making a small Channell that runneth betweene them both and it seemeth that on the Norâ—heast side there is a good Rode for the Monson of South and Southwest windes and along by this coast of Lequeo for the space of three daies we had calme weather and after that wee had a good gale of winde of the Monson and I thinke wee had so great a calme because wee kept so close vnto the shoare About fiue and twentie degrées and â— from the point of Lequeo wee helde our course Northeast and Northeast and by East till wee came vnder nine and twentie degrees Ten miles from Lequeo forwarde wée sawe great store of Cuttle bones driuing on the water and many other shelles that were verie white shewing farre off much like vnto Cotton but it was not long that they draue any thing thicke for in short space after wee might perceiue them scattered abroad verie thinne and but verie few vntill wée came vnder 26. degrées Comming vnder 29. degrées wée held our course halfe a strike East Northeast for the space of eight or nine miles till the Sunne-setting and then wée perceiued right before vs a round and high Island being about sixe miles from it which was the first and furthest Island Westward of the seuen Islandes which at this present are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters which lie vnder 29. degrées and ½ This first Island hath a sharpe point on the West side in the middle at the foot thereof hauing a stone in forme of a Pillar like the Varella in the straight of Singapura by Malacca and on the Northeast side about halfe a mile from thence there lieth a round blacke Cliffe Béeing in the sight of this Island wée presently ranne North and by East as before all that night and in the morning béeing right against it wee sawe all the rest of the seuen Islands and still held our course Northeast vntill we were before the last of the said seuen Islands From whence about sixe miles Northward lyeth two Islands stretching East West whereof that in the East is verie long and high full of blacke shining trées and that in the West much lesse and lower at the East end or point of the lesser Iland there is a high houell that descendeth Westward making a long and lowe point These islands are about a mile distant from each other Westward from this Island about two miles and a halfe there is another island as great and high as the other aforesaid the first great high Island aforesaid is called Icoo and the aforesaid seuen Islands shall all lie on the Southeast side from you and from the first to the last they may be about seuen or eight miles when wee were at the end of the seuen Islands we held our course Northeast towardes the channell that runneth betwéene the great high Island and the Iland that hath the long low point where we passed through comming out againe on the North side This channell is faire and deepe without any cliffes or stones Foure miles Northwestward from this Channell lyeth a verie high and round Island which on the West side seemeth to be full of Cliffes This Iland hath a Mine of Brimstone which lyeth in the middle thereof A mile Northward from this fiery Island lyeth another small and lowe Island and from the aforesaide fiery Islande about eight miles Eastward lyeth the Island of Tanaxuma aforesaid the great high Island of Icoo aforesaide lying on the East side of the Channell on the North side thereof hath a lowe Lande and all along by it is verie good harbour béeing faire and good ground reaching foure or fiue miles East and West Thrée miles Northward from the East end of this Island of Icoo lyeth the aforesaide Island of Tanaxuma as it is also declared in the Description of the Course and Nauigation to the Island of Ferando This Island of Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South béeing altogither low Land and full of Houels and Valleyes with Pine trées that stand farre distant one from the other and is about seuen or eight miles long and in the middle thereof on the West side lyeth a Hauen within certaine Cliffes and Rockes and a mile and a halfe West Northwestward from this Hauen lyeth a very small and lowe Island with a little Houell in the middle On the North end of this smal Iland there are some stones rocks sticking out about the length of the shotte of a great péece all the rest is faire Likewise betwéene this Island and Tanaxuma it is all ouer faire and cleere Seuen or eight miles Northward from the Island of Tanaxuma lyeth the great and high Land of Iapon which coast on the South side stretcheth East and West for the space of ten myles from the channell aforesaid that runneth betweene the Islandes you can not see Tanaxuma vnlesse it bée faire and cleere weather wee ranne East Northeast and were about three miles distant from the aforesaide Channell before wee discouered Tanaxuma as likewise the great land of Iapon which as I saide before is verie high stretching East and West about tenne miles and because Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South being lowe land and the land of Iapon high therefore in that place where wée were they seemed vnto vs like one Lande because they reach each through other Wherevpon the Chinish Pilote which wee had at that time aboord our shippe thought then to be all one land but when we put nearer to it then wée began to sée the Channell that runneth betwéene them beeing distant one from the other crosse ouer about seuen or eight miles and in that manner wée ranne halfe a strike East Northeast towardes the land of Iapon it being flood where the tide ranne Eastward towards the small Island that lyeth by Tanaxuma driuing vs thither whereby we had much labour and paine to get aboue it passing about the length of the shot of a great péece from it wherefore it is necessarie for a man to runne Noâ—theast vntill hée be past that small Iland aforesaid When we had passed about the Island of Tanaxuma wée ranne North Northeast towards the coast being three myles distant from it and right against the creeke of Xebuxij we had a calme beeing the last of Iune hauing departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the mouth or channell of Macau the nintéenth of the same moneth hauing Sailed toward Iapon about eleuen dayes whereof we had thrée daies calme so that our Sailes lay flat to the Mastes being vnder the Island of Lequeo as aforesaid The 34. Chapter Another description of the course from
land The seuenth of Iuly being sunday we had a calme and somtimes but not much Southeast and South Southeast winds holding our course East Northeast northeast and Northeast and by North at 24 and 26 fadome water and as soone as we had past the Island of Lamon we presently had small thinne white sand vpon the ground with some shels being in the morning about seuen miles from the land of Chincheo and saw the Island that is like the Island called Ilha dos Lymoins that is the Island of Lemmons lying by Mallaca and somewhat further wee saw a thinne Lande with a sharpe point standing vpon it which is said to bée a Varella do Chinchon that is the marke or Rocke of Chinchon being vpon the eight day which was munday the next night following wee had a calme wherewith the wind came North being somewhat cold with some shoures of rayne but with a South-east winde we had no raine yet in the night time we had two claps of thunder out of the South-east with lightning out of the Southeast and North parts The ninth being Tuesday wee had the height of the sunne at 23 degrées and ½ in the night hauing had the winde East Southeast with a good gale and all night wée lay driuing without sailes with an East and East Southeast windes and a good gale casting out our Lead and found twenty and foure twenty fadome déep once hauing eightéene fadome where wee found small white Sand with some shels In the morning very earely we had a north wind wherwith we wound eastward hauing nothing but the Foukesaile and the Misen vp vntill euening and at the depths aforesaid wée tooke in our sailes minding to driue the next day we saw land which wee had séene the day before and it lay Northward from vs and halfe a point North and by West The eleuenth being Thursday wée tooke not the height of the Sun because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East and East Southeast windes the waues comming Southeast our Shippe winding Northeast this was by night but by day wée had a Northeast and north Northeast wind in such maner that somtime we kept on the one side and sometimes on the other as wind and weather serued at twenty and foure and twenty fadome deepe small white sand and sometimes eightéene fadome the night before we had much lightening out of the West and South parts being the thirtéene day of the new moone and the day before wée had the heigth of the Sunne at 23 degrées and ½ The land we saw we could hardly discerne but we supposed it to bée the land we had séene the other day The twelfth day being Friday wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East South-east wind in the night time and in the day wée had it North-east at twentie and foure and twentie fadome déepe and sometimes eightéene fadome with small thinne white sand the ground at foure and twenty fadome being somewhat greater sand with some she is when it began to be day we were as we thought about fiue or sixe myles from the land and the night before wée had much lightening round about vs and in the morning some shoures of raine without wind the skye being thicke and close whereby it seemed the weather would chaunge About euening we had a Southeast wind presentlie changing South South-east wherevpon we let fall our sailes holding our course North-east and North east and by East and also East Northeast but most part Northeast so that the depths began to bée greater and were fiue and thirty fadome with small white sand the Moone as then being at the full and the waues alwayes running out of the South-east and with that winde wée sayled for the space of fiue daies together The thirteenth being Saterday wée tooke the height of the Sunne at foure and twenty degrées that night running East Northeast till morning then sailing East and East and by north and found wâ— had sayled twenty myles being eight myles from the coast of China and in the morning we saw land vpon the other side the ground on that side was white thinne and some blacke sand and about sunne setting we cast out out Lead and found fiue and thirtie fadome déepe with very fine black sand The fouretéenth being sunday we took the heigth of the sun being scarse fiue and twenty degrées hauing a southwest wind with very good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North all that night at seuen and thirty fadome déepe with very thinne sand some black muddy ground and at the last watch in the morning wee found muddy ground at the same depth of â—7 fadome mixed with blacke sand and when day began to appeare we saw Lande being part of the coast of â—hina being about four fiue or six miles from it and we discouered the Lagarto with the two sisters that is the cockodril Islands so called and so we cast out our Lead and found two and forty fadome déepe muddy ground and somewhat sandy and y e same day also we saw the Island Fermosa lying by Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and then the winde séemed as though it would haue blowne fuller The fiftéenth day being Munday wée tooke the height of the sunne at 25 degrées and 1 â— and in the night we had the winde North with very good weather running about to the northwest and we ran East northeast Northeast Northeast to east wheÌ„ it began to be day we saw land being the end of the Island Fermosa or y e fair Island which is a long and low land broken or rent in the middle which séemeth to be a breach but it is nothing els but as I said before and presently after eastward we saw another higher land which is Iands called Ilhas dos Reâ—s Magos that is the Island of the thrée Kings we passed along by about 7. or 8. miles from them and that night we had 34 fadome déepe and desiring to know what depth wee found being in sight of the land aforesaid wee found aboue 40 fadome the aforesaid land lying east Southeast from vs being muddy ground that day we had a sharpe wind of the Monson but it helde no longer then til euening and then it was calm againe and so held till morning and then we had it Northwest so running about from the West till it came Southwest and continued till night and then it was calme being Tuesday The sixtéenth being in sight of the Islands aforesaid the same day wee had the heigth of the Sunne at 26 degrées lesse ½ degree and the end of the great Island lay east and east and by south from vs and the little Island east southeast This little Island is higher on the south southwest side then on the Southwest side and the point or hooke of y e southwest part hath a breach or rent to the which the néerer you approch
in great danger The 45. Chapter Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca IN the entry of the Hauen of Patane lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca to the Island of Bintao which lyeth by the straight of Singa Pura vnder the Equinoctiall line the streames doe alwaies runne Southward in the months of Nouember and December From the Island Pulo Condor lying right against the hauen and land of Camboia to the Island Pulo Timao lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca at such time as you come froÌ„ China holding your course halfe a strike from the south the streams run towards the Island Borneo and being halfe a strike Southwestward then the streames run towards the coast of Pan which lyeth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca From Pulo Condor to the Island Pulo Sesir lying right against the coast of Camboia the streames run Eastward and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China the streames runne to the coast of Champa and from the Falce Varella which is distant from the right Varella fiftéen miles lying on the coast of Camboia y e streames runne Eastward about fiue or sixe myles from the coast which is at the end of Iuly and in the month of August In the Monson of the South windes when you saile from Mallacca to China the streames from the Gulfe of Pulo Catao and the Island Aynao runne to the créeke of Enseada da Cauchinchina vntill the last of December and from Ianuary forward then the streams in that Gulfe and countrey runne towards the Sands that lie ouer against the coast of Champa in Camboia from the other side and the later it is in the yeare from the Month of Ianuary forward the stronger they run towards the sands In the Monson of China when you saile from China to Mallacca then the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao to y e Island Puto Cambir both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa It happeneth oftentimes that from the eight and twenty of Iuly to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you haue calme sea and then you haue the Terreinhos which are Windes blowing from the land out of the West and northwest and the Viracoins which are winds that come from the Sea out of the East Southeast and east Northeast being in the North they presently change into the south whervpon it becommeth calme till the Terreinhos or land winds doe come again and thus they hold about two miles from the coast and not further for they are winds that do only blow vpon y e coast as in other places it is already sufficiently declared in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins When you saile by the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo towards the land of Bungo in the Island of Iapon the streames in that country do run eastward to the Island of Tanaxuma From 30 degrées Northward a little further theÌ„ to the middle way to Iapon the streames from that country to the coast of China run northward towards the créeke A Enseada de Nanguyn in the monson of the south and southwest winds In this monson of South and Southwest winds the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao The 46. Chapter Of the tides both for ebbe and flood by the daies and houres of the Moone in the haueÌ„ of Macau in China with the height of the same Hauen found by experience of an expert Pilot. THe 19. of September I marked the course of the Tides of China within the hauen of Macau it being Full Moone and I found it to be full sea about halfe an houre and somewhat more after eight of the clocke in the morning which I tryed at the Full moone to sée if it would agrée with the New Moone The 3. of Februarie An. 1585. I tooke the height of the Sunne which as then was about 13. degrées from the line and I found that the Hauen of Macau lieth full vndec 22. degrées 1 â— and as then I likewise tried the tides of the same hauen and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock the moone being thrée daies old in such sort that by the same account with a new Moone it is full sea in that hauen at ten a clocke and 2 â— in the morning which I also tried by the new Moone The 16. of Februarie Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Hauen of Macau it being then full moone and found the first day of the full moone that it was high water at eleuen of the clocke and a halfe before noone The 2. of Iune Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Hauen of Macau found it to be full Sea iust at 12. of the clocke at noâ—ne the moone being foure dayes old so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clocke in the morning béeing new moone but these Tides of China fall not out iustly vnlesse it be foure daies before and fiue daies after the changing of the Moone for then there is as much water as vpon the third day which I affirme to be most true because I haue often and many times tryed it to be so The cause is for that before it it is all Islands and Channels so that when the waters beginne to fall they ebbe not aboue thrée houres but with an East wind they ebbe with a greater course The 47. Chapter Of the signes and tokens of the tides waters and windes vpon the coast of China and in the way to Iapon IN the time of the monson of the South and Southwest windes it is most certaine in the whole coast of China and the way to Iapon that when the winds of the monson blow and from thence run into the East that they turne not againe out of the East into the south but from thence into the North and hauing continued there for a certaine time they turne againe into the east and from thence into the South if it be a Northeast wind then it turneth often times into the Southwest and not into the East but not often but the surest is as aforesaid It changeth also often times from North to South and not into the East which is very common and when the Sunne setteth and hath some red carnation cloudes about it and that many beames issueth from the Sunne in such manner that it séemeth to blaze then it is a signe of great stormes and tempests Likewise in the rising and going downe of the Moone if it sheweth in the like maner it is a signe of stormes and tempests When the Sunne riseth so faire and cléere that you may in a manner sée into it and perfectly discerne the compasse thereof then it signifieth good weather The like doth it signifie in the setting of
them with any Pâ—ppe but with small Foists and Barks of the countrey This shalâ—ow Channell lieth vnder 12. degrees and running thorough the aforesaid channell between the Islands Tycao and Buâ—yas as I said before we sailed Southward about 2. miles from the Island of Masbate which stretcheth East and West eight miles long being in breadth foure miles and lieth vnder 12. degrees and 1 â— in the middle thereof and is somewhat high land From the said channell betwéene Tycao and Buryas we held our course West Northwest for thirteene miles leauing the Island Masbate on the South side and the Island Buryas on the North side at the end of thirteene miles we came by an Island called Banton which is in forme like a Hat vnder 12. degrees and â…” when we had sailed the aforesaid thirtéene miles and eight miles more on the South side we left the Island called Rebuian which stretcheth Northwest and Northwest and by North and Southeast and Southeast and by South for the space of eight miles béeing high and crooked Lande whereof the North point lieth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there you finde 35. fadome deepe with white sand From the aforesaide Island of Banton Southward nine miles there beginneth and followeth three Islandes one called Bantonsilla which is a small Island in forme of a Sugar loofe the second Crymara beeing somewhat great in length reaching East and West about 2. miles the third Iâ—aa or the Isle of Goates hauing certaine Houels By all these Islandes aforesaide you may passe with all sortes of Shippes whereof the foremost lyeth Southward vnder 12. degrees and 1 â— from the Island Bantonsilla or small Bantoâ— we helde our course Northwest for the space of foure miles to the Channell betweene the Islands called de Vereâ—eâ— and the Island Marinduque the Vereâ—es lying on the South side vnder 12. degrées and ¼ which are two small Islands like two Frigâ—â—teâ— and the Island Marinduque on the North side vnder 12. degrees and â— which is a great Island stretching West Northwest and East Southeast hauing in length twelue and in breadth seuen miles On the North side with the Islande Lucon it maketh a long and small channell running somewhat crooked which is altogither full of shallowes and sandes wheâ—y no ships can passe through it The â—urthâ—â—â— point Wesâ—ward of the same Island lyeth vnder 1â— degrees and ¼ it is high lande on the East side hauing the forme of a miâ—e of brimstone or fiery hill and on the west side the land runneth downeward at the point thereof being round like a loafe of bread in the Channell betweene it and the Vereâ—es there are eighteene fadome deepe with small blacke sand From the aforesaide Channell of Vereâ—es and Marinduque we held our course West Northwest twelue miles to the lande of Mindoro to the point or Hooke called Dumaryn lying full vnder thirteene degrees fiue miles forwarde from the said Channell on the South side wee left an Island called Ilha del Maestro del Campo that is the Island of the Coronell lying vnder twelue degrées and ¼ which is a small and flat Island In this course wee had 45. fadome déepe with white sand By this point or end of the Island Marinduque beginneth the Island of Myndoro which hath in length East and west fiue and twentie miles and in breadth twelue miles whether of the furthest point Southward lieth vnder thirtéen degrées and the furthest point Northwarde vnder thirtéene degrées and 1 â— and the furthest point Westwarde vnder thirtéene degrees This Island with the Island of Lucon maketh a Channell of fiue miles broad and ten or twelue fadome déepe with muddie ground of diuers coulers with white sande Fiue miles forward from Marinduque lieth the riuer of the towne of Anagacu which is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From thence 2. miles further lieth the Islands called Bacco which are thrée Islands lying in triangle two of them being distant from the land about thrée hundred cubits and betwéene them and the land you may passe with small shippes and from the lande to the other Island are about two hundred cubites where it is altogither shallowes and sandes so that where the shippes may passe outward about 150. cubits from the land you leaue both the Islands on the south side running betwéen the third Island and the riuer called Rio del Bacco somewhat more from the middle of the Channell towards the Island which is about a mile distant from the other the Channell is ten fadome déepe withâ—â—ood and shelles vpon the ground the riuer of Bacco is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From this Island with the same course two miles forward you passe by the point called El capo de Rescaseo where wee cast out our Lead and found that a man may passe close by the land and there you shall find great strong streames and halfe a mile forward with the same course lyeth the towne of Myndoro which hath a good hauen for shippes of three hundred tunnes Three miles Northward from the same Hauen lyeth the Island called Cafaa stretching East and West béeing Hill ground From the said towne of Myndoro wée helde our course West Northwest eight myles till wée came to the point or hooke of the Sandes called Tulen lying vpon the Island of Lucon which Sande or Banke reacheth into the sea halfe a mile from the coast you must kéepe about an hundred cubites from it where you finde eight fadome water muddie and shelly ground you runne along by those sands North and North and by West for the space of two myles till you come to the riuer called Rio de Anasebo all the rest of the coast called De los Limbones to the mouth or entrie of the Baye called Manilla which are foure miles is sayled with the same course The Limbones which are Islands so called are high in forme like a paire of Organs with good Hauens for small shippes running along by the Limbones and two miles beyond them on the South side wee leaue the Islands of Fortan and foure Islands more but the thrée Islandes of Lubao which are verie lowe lying vnder thirteene 13. degrées and 1 â— and the Limbones lie in the mouth or entrie of the Baye of Manilla vnder 14. degrées and ¼ From thence wée ranne Northwest for the space of sixe miles to the Hauen of Cabite kéeping along by the land lying on the West side where it is shallowe and is called Los Baixos del Rio de Cannas the shallowes of the riuer of Réedes all along this Baye in the same course there is from ten to foure fadome deepe Beeing by the point or Hooke of Cabite then wee kept but an hundred paces from it running Southwest South Southwest South vntill wee discouered the whole mouth or entrie of the bay where wée might anker at foure fadome about two hundred cubits from the â—and and then the towne of Manilla was two
miles Northward from vs. The 53. Chapter The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla to the Hauen of Macau in China with all the courses and scituations of the places SAyling out of the Hauen of Cubite lying in the Bay of Manilla wée helde our course Westward for the space of eightéene myles to the point called El Cabo de Samballes and when wée were eight miles on our way wée left the two Islandes Maribillas on the South side and sailed about a mile from them the point of Samballes aforesaid lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées and â…” being low lande at the end of the same coast of Lucon on the West side FroÌ„ the hooke or point aforesaid we ran North and North and by West for the space of fiue and thirtie miles about a mile from the coast of Lucon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and â…” From this Cape de Bullinao wée helde our course North and North and by east for fiue and fortie miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador which is the furthest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land maketh a great Créeke or Bough and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Boiador we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco or the white Island which is a small Island lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fadome browne muddie ground From the same Island Ilha Branco wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest for the space of sixtéene miles to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton and maketh the riuer two mouths or entries and is a small Island about three miles great The 54. Chapter The Nauigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine with the scituation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly holding our course Southeast and Southeast and by East beeing in the wane of the Moone for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome with soft muddie ground vntill we were about the Island Ilha Branco yet we sawe it not but by the height we knew we were past it Being beyond it we ran East southeast an hundred and fiftie miles to get aboue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pescadores and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas that is the faire Islandes This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾ there it is thirtie fadome déepe although we saw them not notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them Being past the faire Islands we held our course East and East and by North for two hundred and sixtie miles vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos sayling about fiftie myles from them the said Chinar told me that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many and that they haue many and verie good Hauens and that the people and inhabitants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas and are apparelled like the Bysayas and that there also are mines of gold He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes ladeâ—â— with Buckes and Hartes bides and with gold in graines or verie small pieces to traffique with them of the coast of China which he assured me to be most true saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island bringing of the same wares with him to China which I beléeued to be true for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true The furthest or vttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées Béeing past these Islands then you come to the Islandes of Iapon whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando where the Portingales vse to trafficke they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles and the furthest Eastward lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées we ran still East and East and by North vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone or fiery Hils being seuenty miles beyond them thirty miles further I should finde foure Islands lying together which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads y t brought gold in small péeces and some white Cangas of Algodon which are péeces of Cotton Linnen so called by the Chinars as also salt fish the Spanish Atun or Haberdine which hee said came out of other Islandes Eastward from Iapon and by y e tokens and markes he shewed me I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good hauens and Channels being a country full of Rice Corne Fish and Flesh and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with and that there they haue much siluer Running thus East and East and by North about three hundred miles from Iapon we found a very hollow water with the streame running out of the North and Northwest with a ful and very broad sea without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past and what winde soeuer blewe the Sea continued all in one sort with the same hollow water and streame vntill we had past y e seuen hundred miles about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne where wee began to lose the said hollow sea and stream whereby I most assuredly thinke and beleeue that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles we found
all Saints to Pernanbuco or to Portingale then hold your course Eastward and if the wind serue you hold East and East and by North for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrées for if you be vnder 11 degrées you wil fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Barâ—ys that is the Créeke of emptying of vessels and likewise when you come from Portingall hauing sight of land at eleuen degrées then put not towards it to shorten your way but rather holde your course Southward from it From this Bay of all Saints to Pernanbuco is a hundred miles and you runne along the coast northeast and southwest From thence to the Riuer Rio dos Ilhas or the riuer of Islands the coast runneth Southwest and Northeast and Southwest and by West and Northeast and by East The 58. Chapter The course or Nauigation to the riuer Rio dos Ilhas that is the riuer of the Islands in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the riuer of the Islands you must vnderstand that the Islands lie vnder 14. degrées and ¾ séeking to finde them from the moneth of March forward then you shall run to the height of 15. degrées and ½ and although you be vnder 15. degrées and 2 â— you néede not feare and séeing the land vnder these degrées then you shall see certaine high hilles called As Serras dos Aymores when you sée those hilles then you shall come along the coast Northwarde not fearing any thing for from thence Northward there are no shallows As soone as you sée the Ilands for there are no other then on the same coast you shall sée a rouÌ„d hill standing along by the Sea side on the North side whereof you put into the Riuer and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands kéeping from them and there by the said Islandes you may anker and if you be in that country when the Northeast winds doe blow then looke for land vnder 14. degrées and if you see a flat land then it is the Island called Camamuâ— by the which you shall run southward and being at the end of the flatte land then you shall sée a high land along by the sea side like the other aforesaid all along by the sea side In the place where this lande beginneth to shew high there lieth a small riuer called Rio das Contas that is the riuer of Beads but it is not to be entered and hath a white harde stone for a marke From thence to the Islands are 9. miles Southward and comming where the aforesaid high land endeth then you shall finde a great Créeke and being West Southwest you shall see another high land at the foot whereof which is almost in the middle way to the créeke you shall see certaine white houses which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Sugar is prepared and being there you shal presently see the Islands The 59. chapter How to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro that is the sure Hauen lying in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro in the time of the Southeast windes which is in March and so forward you shall not put higher then to 16. degrées ½ for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea and when you saile East West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times being by the land that you sée a long high hill like a sharpe point which is called Monte Pasqual froÌ„ thence you shall run Northward west the same hill is westward from you then you must hold towards the land yet with good regard and foresight And when you sée the land and that you perceiue a round Houell then Southward from the saide Houell you shall see a Hill with a great strand on the North side whereof lyeth the Hauen of Porto Seguro and running along by the coast aboue in the lande you find the towne of Porto Seguro This height is a white stonie rocke and on the North side of this stonie rocke there is a great vally when you are East and west with this stonie rocke then Northward you shall sée the water breake which is vpon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea on the South side whereof you are right ouer against the towne of Porto Seguro If you begin this voyage when the winds are northeast come to 15. degrees and â…” not seeing any hills then leaue not running along the coast when you are vnder 15. degrées the first high land you shall sée will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast if vnder that height you see a riuer then make not towardes the land for there it hath certaine dangerous shallowes called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio from thence Southward lyeth Porto Seguro and passing along the coast and séeing the water breake vpon the other sand lying two miles further inward to sea then you shall passe by it kéeping to seaward from it and when you are at the end thereof then the towne will be Westward from you you may well put to it alwaies hauing a care how you goe and anker vnder the height aforesaid Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro then you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands lying by the riuer called Rio Grande that is the great Riuer and when you are past Rio Grande then make towards the land againe to know it as aforesaid The 60. Chapter How to saile to the Hauen called Bahia dâ— Espirito Santo that is the Bay of the Holy Ghost lying in the coast of Brasilia SAiling to the hauen of Spirito Santo béeing past the Sandes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos vnder 19. degrées and ½ then you shall sée lande at 20. degrées for in this coast you haue no monsons or courses of certaine winds If you chance to sée land at 19. degrées and ½ and that it bée on the Northwest side from you being flat land then you are on the North side of the Hauen of Spirito Santo which is the land lying aboue Criquare and aboue y e riuer called Rio Dolce that is the riuer of Swéet or fresh water you shall holde your course along by the land vntill the land beginneth to rise hauing some Hilles but trust not to the first that you shall sée but you shall sée a high round hill which lyeth along by the sea side and is called La Sierra de Mestre Aluaro And when you come to this Hill on the North side you shall sée a riuer called Rio dos Reis Magos that is the riuer of the thrée Kings of Cullen and on the South side then the mouth of the Baye will presently
in the middle it hath thrée houels whereof that in y e middle is the greatest From this Island De Pinos to Cabo de Corrientes you must runne West Northwest by the which course you shall sée it This point on the sea side is a Lande running downeward vpon it hauing some palme Trées and on the West side a sandy strand where there is a Roade where you may lye Vpon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill which stretcheth further out theÌ„ all other points when from thence you put in you shall sée on the Lande righter ouer you a Lake of fresh water where if néede bee you may supply your want To saile from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Beeing two or thrée miles to Sea-ward you must runne West Northwest From the Island De Pinos to Cabo de S. Anton there are two great créekes one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico behind the Land inward you shall sée certaine Hils called Las Sierras Guaniguanico Cape de S. Anton is a long Point full of trées with some bushes with sandye strandes and from it there runneth a bank or sand for the space of 4. miles northwestward Sayling from the Point of S. Anton to new Spaigne in winter time y t is from August to March then you must hold your course without y e Islands and Cliffes called Las Alactanes west northwestward with y t which course hauing sailed 60. or 70. miles you shall find ground which shal be of shels or great saÌ„d This you shal find til you be vnder 24. degrées if you find ground at lesse then 40. fadome sailing with the same course then hold your course north northwest northwest by west when therewith you begin to increase in depth then turn againe to your first course of northwest and wheÌ„ you begin to lose land then for the space of 20. miles you must saile West wherwith you shall be north south with the Island Bermeia FroÌ„ thence you must saile southwest till you be vnder 20. degrées if you sée not land you shall run west for at that time it is not good to goe beneath y e heigth Vnder this height course you shal sée La torre Blanca y t is the white tower if you chance to discouer y e Riuer of S. Petro S. Paulo then beyond y e riuer you shal sée certaine gréene hils but not very high If you finde 35. fadome déepe with muddie ground with shelles in some places then from thence you shall hold your course South and South and by East vntill you bée right against the fieldes of Almeria if you come out of the Sea you shall séeke ground lower and finding 30. or 40. fadome with some muddy ground then you are East and West with the riuer of Almeria about seuen miles from the land and if in the Southwest you sée the hilles called las Sierras del Papalo and that they run one within the other then you are Northeast and Southwest from them From thence you shall bolde your course South and South and by West whereby the hilles of Papalo will begin to shew themselues which wil make two round hilles you shall likewise see Las Sierras de Calaquote which are certaine reddish hilles This rowe of Hilles commeth out to the sea side If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa that is the rich towne thrée miles from the land you shall finde 80. and 90. fadome deepe muddy ground The riuer of S. Peter and S. Paul lyeth vnder 21. degrées and los Campos d'Almeria that is the fields of Almeria vnder 20. degrées Villa Risa la Vieya that is olde Villa Risa lyeth vnder 19. degrees and 2 â— Villa Risa la Vieya is certaine hils whereof the one end reach vnto the Sea side they are not very high but make many openings or rents like the hilles of Abano called Organs stretching North and South if you chaunce to come out of the Sea and should see the Hilles of Villa Risa then you shoulde see that they stretch North and South and the hils of S. Martyn stretch East and West you may know them another way which is that if you make Westward towards them comming close to them they will shew to be lower then the Hils of S. Martyn which are greater and higher as you passe along the Sea coast by them and béeing thrée myles to Sea-ward from Villa Risa you shall find ground which by S. Martins you shall not find although you were but halfe a myle from them Lastly although you should haue no knowledge of Lande yet you might knowe it by the markes aforesaid To Léeward from Villa Risa lieth a Cliffe called N. Bernards which is in forme like a suger loafe From Villa Risa la Vieya or out of Villa Risa to S. Iohn de Luz you shall hold your course South and South and by East and you shal find ground of shels muddy ground at thirty fadome towards the Land By the Riuer of Vera Crus you shall find sandye ground and in some places muddye ground If you were without then you must knowe that from S. Christopher to S. Iohn de Luz it is all sandye strandes and being East and west with the point called Punta Gordâ— then you are North and South with the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and being North-east and South-west with the Island at lesse then forty fadome déepe towards the Land then you shall haue reddish ground and in some places shels and from forty fadomes forward white muddy ground If you come out of the sea and desire to know if you bee East and West with the Island then you must marke a high houell that runneth out from the hils of Vera Crus And when you are East and west with this Houell so are you likewise East and West with the Island you must likewise vnderstande that when the Hill of Sierra Neuada y t is the snowy hill lieth West west and by south from you then are you likewise east and west with the Island aforesaid then you shall presently sée the point called AntoÌ„ Niquardo as also Mendano Montuoso or the high Houell aforesaid and you shal likewise sée the sea-coast Medelâ—n and on the North-west side the Point of Punta Gorda if you desire with a North wind to be in the hauen then run at 18 20 fadome déepe whereby you shal passe to loofeward through the chanell going close to the bulwark yet shunning it you shall anker on the loofe side for to Léeward it hath no great depth If you depart from the Point of S. Anton in summer time towards new Spain then you must hold your course westward for
12. From this place forward beginneth the coast of Malabar which is contained within the coast of India FRom Angediua to Batecala are miles 12. From Batecala to the fortresse of Barcelar are 5. From Barcelar to the Ilands called Primeiro are 6. From Primeiro Ilandes to the fortresse of Mangalor are 6. From Mangalor to Monte Fermoso are 4 From Monte Fermoso to Monte de Lin are 10. From Monte de Lin to the fortresse of Cananor are 6. From Cananor to Calecut are 8. From Calecut to Coulette are 2. From Coulette to Chale and Parangale are 7. From Parangale to Tanor are 3. From Tanor to Panane are 6. From Panane to Cochiin are 15. From Cochiin to a place called Arbore de Porca or the tree of the Sow or Hogge are 9. From Arbore de Porca to Caule Coulao are 9. From Caule Coulao to the fortresse Coulao are 6. From Coulao to the Barreiras are 4. From the Barreiras to Briniao are 8. From Briniao to the Ilandes called Ilha de Tarauancor are 6. From Tarauancor to the Cape de Comoryn are 6. There endeth the coast commonly called in the Orientall coast the Countrie of India wherein is contained the coast of Malabar as aforesaid all the rest of the Orientall coastes haue their particular names seuerall from India as I haue sufficiently declared and all the miles aforesaid as also all those in the description of the voiage to and from India are all Spanish myles whereof 17 and ½ are one degrée which are fiftéene Dutch miles Hereafter followeth an Instruction memorie of the yeelding or declining of the compasse in the Nauigations and courses of the Portingales into the East Indies both outward and homeward in what places and how much they yeeld northwest northeast that is how much the needle of the compasse windeth or turneth towards the east or west all perfectlie set downe and truly marked by the Portingale Pilots that saile ordinarilie SAyling from Lisbone almost to the point of Cabo Verde theÌ„ the néedles or lines of the compasse doe yéeld northeastward that is towards the east two 3. parts of a strike and more From thence about 4 or 5. degrées further on the north side of the Equinoctiall being 70. or 80. miles from the coast then the néedle of the comâ—â—sse windeth Eastward that is northeastward halfe a strike if you be 100. or 120. miles from the land then it windeth northeastward â…“ part of a strike Running along by the coast of Brasilia to 7.8 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall then the compasse will winde Northeastward or to the east â…“ part of a strike that is when you sayle close by the coast of Brasilia from 17. 18. degrées vnder which height lieth the sands called os Baixos dos Abrolhos then the compasse will winde Northeastward ¼ or â…” partes of a strike that is when you run not aboue 100. or 120. miles from the coast of Brasilia Running along by the Iland of Martin Vaaz theÌ„ the compasse windeth northeastward a strike or more From thence forward till you bee vnder 33. degrées the compasse windeth northeastward a strike and a halfe to seauentie or eightie miles beyond the Iland of Tristan da Cunha From thence to the Cabo de Bona Speranza then the compasse beginneth againe to winde lesse and if you marke the compasse well that it windeth halfe a strike to the northeast then you are hard by the Cape de bona Speranza not aboue 30. or 40. miles at the furthest froÌ„ it for when you are north south with the cape then the compasse wil winde northeastward â…“ part of a strike Sayling from thence forward if you mark the compasse find it euen then you are 80. miles eastward from the cape das Agulhas Sayling the Compasse if it windeth Northwestward â…” parts of a strike that is towards the west then you are North South with the point called Cabo das Correntes and being vnder 25. and 26. deg till you come vnder 20. degrées and that the Compasse yéeldeth ¼ of a strike and more Northwestward then look out for the Islande called S. Laurence for you shal presently sée it when you are right ouer against Mosambique then the Compasse yeeldeth a strike or somewhat lesse towards the northwest hath y e same differeÌ„ce til you come to the Equinoctial line towards India Being 200. miles East and West with the hauen of Goa or the coast of India to Cabo de Comorijn then the Compasse windeth Northwestward a strike and a half and vpon the coast of India a strike and â…“ Sayling from Cochiin to Portingal vntill you haue past the Ilands Maldiua south and southwestward then the Compasse will wind Northwestward a strike and a half till you be vnder 8. and 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall line and if you find it lesse then a strike a halfe then you are on y e west side of the sands called A Saya de Malha that is the dublet of Iron rings because they are like it And when you are vnder 27. or 30. degrées holding your course west then you shall find that the Compasse yéeldeth a strike and ¼ Northwestward and when you find it so theÌ„ you are North south with the point of S. Roman lying on the furthest end southeastward from the Iland of S. Laurence Being north and south with the sands called Os Baixos de Iudia making towardes the land called Terra do Natal til you bee vnder 30. and 31. deg then the Compasse wil yéeld Northwestward ¾ of a strike or somewhat lesse then you shall be North south with the point called Cabo das Correntes Comming vnder 32. 33. degr forward and finding the Compasse euen not winding Eastward nor westward then you are right vnder the Meridian you must vnderstande that to marke the Compasse well that it saileth not any thing at all you must alwaies haue your eye vpon if in the Peylen the better to looke vnto it for if you sayle therin you shal hardly gesse right nor make any good account Hauing past the Cape de bona Speranza sayling to the Ilande of S. Helena then the Compasse windeth Northeastward 1 â— part of a strike in the Islande of S. Helena halfe a strike and from the Iland of S. Helena to the Iland of Ascention then the Compasse windeth Northeastward â…” parts of a strike When you sayle from Portingall to Brasilia till you bee vnder the height of the point of Cabo de S. Augustin this Iland of Ascention then you must vnderstand that the more the Compasse windeth northeastward or eastward the further eastward you are from the said point therefore you must haue great regard thereunto for that if you bee comming in Peylen you shall find it there to be euen as I said before From the Islande of Ascention to the cliffe called Penedo de S. Pedro about 20. or
all places There is likewise great store of Sugar which is much esteemed and also caryed into all countries of Christendome which causeth great trafficke vnto those Ilands as well by Spaniardes and Portingalles as other nations and is the common staple for the shippes that sayle out of Spayne into the West Indies and refreshe themselues there and also take in such Wyne as they commonly vse to carry with them to the West Indies They haue also great abundance of Cattle and Cammelles and are now inhabited by Spanyardes hauing yet therein many of the naturall borne inhabitantes which they doe call Guanchas who by reason of their long conuersation with the Spaniardes doe wholly vse their customes and manner of apparell The chiefe of these Islands is great Canaria where there is a Bishop and the inquisition with the tribunal Royall and it hath the gouernment ouer all the other Islandes that are called the Canaries The 6. of Iulie wee were vnder 32. degrees where wee lost the generall North-East wind and had a calme and saw much of the hearbe called Sargasso which couered all the sea The 〈◊〉 of the same month we got againe before the wind being vnder 34. degrees and then we saw no more of the hearbe Sargasso but a faire cleare sea The eighteenth of Iulie wee were vnder 39. degrees vnder which height lieth the Iland called de Coruo and the Island of Tercera and also the riuer of Lisbone all these dayes we had many calmes The next day wee had a West winde being a right fore-wind and saw many flying fishes almost as great as Haddockes that flew thrée or foure fadomes high aboue the water The 22. of Iuly the winde continuing about noone we saw the Ilands called Flores and de Coruo which lie one close to the other from thence to the Island of Tercera Eastward are 70. miles At that time wee began to haue many sick men that is to say some sicke in their eyes and some in their breaste and bellies by reason of the long voiage and because their victuals began to loose the taste sauour and many wanted meat whereby diuers of them through want were compelled to seeth rice with salt water so that some of them died which many times were found vnder the fore deck that had laine â—ead two or three dayes no man knowing it which was a pittifull sight to behold considering the miserie they indured aboard those ships There died in our ship from India vnto that place of slaues and others to the number of 24. persons The same day about Euening being hy the Islandes of Flores and Coruo wee perceiued thrée shippes that made towards vs which came from vnder the land which put vs in great feare for they came close by our Admiral shot diuers times at him at another ship of our companie whereby wee perceiued them to be English men for they bare an English flagge vpon their maine tops but none of them shewed to be aboue 60. tunnes in greatnes About Euening they followed after vs and all night bore lanternes with Candles buâ—ning in them at their sternes although the Moone shined The same night passing hard by the Island of Fayarl the next day being betwéene the Island of S. George that lay on our right hand and the small Island called Câ—oâ—o on our left hand we esspied the thrée English ships still following vs that tooke counsell together whereof one sayled backwards thinking that some other ship had come after vs without company for a small time was out of sight but it was not long before it came againe to the other two wherewith they tooke counsell came all thrée together against our shippe because we lay in the lée of all our ships and had the Island of S. George on the one side in steede of a sconce thinking to deale so with vs that in the end we should be constrained to runne vppon the shore whereof wee wanted not much and in that manner with their flagges openly displayed came lustily towardes vs sounding their Trumpets and sayled at the least three times about vs beating vs with Musket and Caliuer and some great péeces and did vs hurt in the body of our shippe but spoyled all our sayles and ropes and to conclude we were so plagued by them that no man durst put forth his head and when wee shot off a peece we had at the least an houres worke to lade it againe whereby wee had so great a noise and crie in the ship as if we had all bin cast away whereat the English men themselues beganne to mocke vs and with a thousand iesting words called vnto vs. In the meane time the other shippes hoised all their sailes did the best they could to saile to the Island of Tercera not looking once behinde them to help vs doubting they should come too late thether not caring for vs but thinking themselues to haue done sufficiently so they saued their own stakes whereby it may easily be séene what company they kéepe one with the other what order is among them In the end the English men perceiuing small aduantage against vs little knowing in what case and feare we were as also because we were not far froÌ„ Tercera left vs which made vs not a litle to reioyce as thinking our selues to be risen from death to life although we were not well assured neither yet voide of feare till we lay in the road before Tercera vnder the safetie of the Portingales fort that we might get thether in good time we made all the sailes we could on the other side we were in great doubt because wee knew not what they did in the Island nor whether they were our friendes or enemies and wee doubted so much the more because wee found no men of war nor any Caruels of aduise froÌ„ Portingal as we made our accounts to doe that might conuay vs from thence or giue vs aduise as in that countrie ordinarilie they vse to do because the English men had bin so victorious in those parts it made vs suspect that it went not well with Spaine they of the Iland of Tercera were in no lesse feare then we for that séeing our deer they thought vs to be Englishmen that we came to ouer run the Iland because the 3. English meÌ„ had bouÌ„d vp their flags came in company with vs for the which cause the Iland sent out 2. Caruels that lay there with aduise from the King for the Indian ships that should come thither Those Caruels came to view vs and perceiuing what wee were made after vs wherevppon the English ships left vs made towardes them because the Caruels thought them to be friends and shunned them not as supposing them to be of our company but we shot foure or fiue times and made signes vnto them that they should make towards the Island which they presently did The English men perceiuing that did put forwards into
Ilandes ly the aforesaid sand drougthes wherfore I wish you not to go too néere them for they are dangerous There lieth a sand drougth 4. miles from the first Iland of Angoxa towardes Mosambique which euerie springtide is couered with the sea hauing other sandes round about it that are alwaies couered with the sea therefore I wish you to take héed of them you may from thence runne along the shore where it is déepe water from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towardes Mosambique there is a haueÌ„ called Os Coaraias that is the Corales from the which hauen about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif which is very dangerous and which a man can hardly shunne till he be almost vpon it and with a Springtide the water breaketh not ouer it wherefore you must take héed vnto it for many shippes haue striken vpon it and Don Ioan Periera fell vpon it when you passe it you must put 3 miles from it into y e séa North east northeast by East being by night but by day you may sayl w t more securitie and looke about you yet nothing going neerer to the shore then 25 fadome déepe in this course you shall passe by the drouthes of Musicatte and following your course North east you shall come right vpon the Ilands of Mosambique if you haue occasion to anker before you come to Musicatte then keepe off from the cliffe towards the land til you be at 15 fadome and there you may anker for it is good grouÌ„d yet but in few places only vnder the point of Musicatte at 20 fadome and more you shall haue faire ground the point of Musicatte lieth with the Ilands of Angoxas North east and South west being 18 miles distant from theÌ„ce to Mosambique you runne North east along the coast the East side of the Iland Premeira lyeth with the drongthes Northeast South west and some what North east and by East and South west and by West the land of the Ilandes Premeiras on the side of Mosambique lyeth vnder 16 degrees and and ¾ you runne along by those Ilands and sands East and West and East by North and West by south and if there you find your self to bee inwards at 12 or 13 foote and lesse within a length of a great shot of the Ilands yet bee not abashed but beware of the outside which is full of stones and other filth whereby no meanes you can anker as being nothing but wood stonâ— if you chance to be in the middle way betwéene the Ilands the drougths with an East wind then you must passe in out betweene the first Iland the drougth which Iland lyeth in middle way from the Ilands Premieras on the side of Soâ—â—ala as also from the third Iland towardes Mosambique running along the West side at 7.10 12 fadome déepe the other drougthes lie in the middle way vnder the stone cliffes therefore you néed not feare them but betwéene the Iland from the trees that are vpon the East side you can by no meanes passe for it is all ouer nothing but droughthes and shallowes From the South west side of these Ilands Premieras and Northeast and south west with the first Iland 7 miles from it there lyeth a sand drougth of foure fadome déepe hoth in leÌ„gth breadth the cariage of a great shotte in length tenne or twelue myles from the Ilands Premieras lieth the Riuer Quilimani where the Coast reacheth East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south and you shall find 6 or 7 fadome déepe within three miles of the land where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani which you must take héed of for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea and if you find your self inwards from Cauo das Correntes you may at all times anker for it is good ground because you are vpon the banks and haue no cause to feare because the wind blowing from the land wil alwaies helpe you whereby you may put into the sea as you thinke good The 11. Chapter The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. Iago that is the smal hauen of S. Iacob which is the mouth of the Riuer Ganges lying in the kingdome of Bengala HE that desireth to sayle from India to Poâ—to Piqueno or the small hauen lying in BeÌ„gala I mean outward about the Iland of Seylon he must set sayle out of the Hauen of Cochiin betweene the which and the 20. of Aprill holding his course along the shore to a place called Briniao which lieth vpon the Cape or poynt of Comoriin that is the furthest poynt or end of the Indian coast southwestward from thence holding his course south till he be vnder 6 degrées ¾ and from thence South east to 5 degrées and â…” and being ther he must runne East till hee seeth the Iland of Seylon for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla that is the poynt of the Galley is the farthest land from thence lying in the south vnder 6 degrees therefore if you hold your course East till you be vnder 5 degrees and â…” you can not fayle to see the land of the Iland Seylon this way and course you must alwaies hold setting out of Cochâ—â— from the 10. of Aprill to the 20. of the same as I sayd before for yf you depart later from thence you must stay longer because as then the wind beginneth to blow stifly out of the South at other tymes hauing the wind Southwest and Northwest blowing verie strong and blustering wheÌ„ you sée the Iland Seylon you shall sayle along the coast East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south to the first drougth lying scarse vnder 6. degrees and the other drougths ly farther vnder 6 degr ½ 7 miles distant one from the other in the same course of East and West and East and by North and West and by south from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drougth are almost 28 miles Beeing 10 or 15 myles beyond the drougthes you shall sayle Northeast till you bee vnder 16 degrees and ½ from thence running North whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firme land about tenne or twelue myles from the land called O pagode de Iorganatte that is the Idole or Idoles Temple of Iorganatte which is a verie good course for this voyage when you perceiue this land which hath certaine high Hilles you shall see some round Houels that are rounder and higher then the Hilles standing vppon them called Palur by the which you shall passe along Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and Southwest and by south vntill you come to the thinne and low land and passing by it you shall come to a Riuer which hath for a marke a flat high field of sand and an other plaine with a houell hauing on the one side somewhat
the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge being here the depthes will presently beginne to increase to seauen and eight fadome which depthes you shall holde vntill the Cliffes lie behinde you and from thence putting to sea towards the side of Samatra leauing Sabon side being carefull to kéepe from it for you haue nothing els in that place that can hurt you but onely the cliffes which the streames runne vnto you shall likewise take heed on both sides as wel of Sabon as Sumatra for they are all ouer from thence along the coast full of bankes and shallowes These two Cliffes aforesaid being past which you shall almost leaue behinde you you shall presently runne to the land of Sumatra with the lead in your hand not passing lesse then fiue fadome nere vnto the land nor aboue seauen fadome to seaward with your lead neuer out of hand for in this countrie you must rule your selfe more by the lead and depthes then by the compasse When you are at the end of this Iland of Sabon then you haue another Island called Pulo Dure which reacheth to another Island called Pulo Boyon then another Iland called Pulo Buron which lie so close to Sumatra that they séeme to be all one land at the end of this Iland Dure lie 3. Ilands one great and two small This Iland Dure lieth with the point of Sabon where the two small Cliffes lie north northwest and south southeast they are in distance about sixe or seuen miles with 6.7 and 8. fadome water muddie ground when you are right ouer against the Iland called Pulo Buron which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra then run southeast and southeast by south and following that course vntil you come to tenne fadome then runne Southeast vntill you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro from this point to the Iland of Pulo Buron are three miles which is without the channell and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward frō you then run south and south and by east to the 3. Ilands called Calantigas whereof the first hath an Iland lying by it on the south side the middle Iland hath nothing at all and the third Iland that lieth most southward hath an Iland lying by it on the North side These Ilands as you passe by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanianbaro somewhat further lieth an other point called Tanianbaro which is very euen with the sea betwéene these 2. points lieth the Riuer of Andargyn and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the Ilands East and West betweene both the points are 9. miles When you sée this point then from thence forward you shall no more sée the land of Sumatra because there are many créekes from this point you make to the Ilands Calantigas Northwest and Southeast and is in length about seauen miles These Ilands lie vnder 1. degree vpon the south side of the Equinoctiall on the east side of these Ilands you haue many stonie cliffes both aboue vnder the water therefore you must put off from them to seaward for that betweene them the Iland of Linga it is very foule and dangerous if you will goe from the Islandes Calantigas to the Island Varella then hold your course Southeast and Southeast and by East whereby you shall come to it They are in distance 9. miles and in this way you shall finde seuen or eight fadome déepe and close by the land sixtéene and seuentéene fadome on the North side but on the South side it is lesse This Island hath fresh water it lieth right ouer against a point of the land of Samatra called Tanianbon from the which point to the Island are two miles and you runne North Northwest and South Southeast and you must passe betwéene this Island and the point leauing the Island to seaward On the backe bord side in the face of this point lieth thrée Islandes whereof the greatest is called Iambe but along by the land of Samatra you haue neyther Islandes nor Cliffes To runne from the Island Pulo Varella to the Straightes of Palimbon then run Southeast at seuen fadome muddy ground and with this course you shall sée the hill called Monte de Manopyn which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca When you sée this hill then you can hardlie sée the coast of Samatra because of the créekes and you shall kéepe the same course to the said hill runnning a mile and a halfe from it towards the coast of Samatra leauing the hill on the northeast side not comming any nearer to it for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it and when you are right against the hill Manopyn thē you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon lying vppon the Coast of Samatra a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon forward there lieth a smal or thin point of land and on the south side of the same point there are many cliffes rockes about a mile into the sea al lying vnder the water which make the riffes aforesaid wherefore I aduise you to kéep at the least a mile and a halfe or two miles from it be not deceiued by the great depthes that are along by those riffes for that from many depthes you will at the last fall on ground as it happened to a ship which sailing on that side close to the Island Banca at fiftéene fadome strak with his ruther vpon the stones You must likewise bee carefull not to kéepe too neere the land called as Bocas de Palimbon or the mouthes of Palimbon for they are altogether shallowes and sandes let your Lead be still in hand and goe no nearer then fiue fadome and ½ to the land vntill you be past them nor aboue eight fadome to seaward and if you come to eight fadome then rather kéepe at lesse depth as I said before You runne from this hill Manopyn which standeth in the Iland Banca to the mouthes or creekes of Palimbon that lie on the other side of Samatra north northeast south southwest and is in course fiue miles From thence beginneth the straight called Palimbon which reacheth southeastward and sometimes eastward and in other places southward till you be past through it being past the hill of Manopyn about two miles beyond it you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creeke of Palimbon with the Lead in hand keeping a mile from it at 5. fadome and ½ and goe no nearer to it for they are altogether shallowes and sandes wherefore I counsell you not to goe nearer then 5. fadome and ½ and towards Banca not nearer then 8. fadome holding your course in this manner till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon being there you shall make with the land of Samatra till you be within halfe a mile thereof where th◠land about a long mile right out before you maketh a point and being
east west with the south Iland of Lampacon and betwéen it Lampacon there is no other hinderance but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland leauing it on the Northwest side passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward and being through it theÌ„ you are in the channel which comming from the sea runneth to the mouth or entrie called the Hares eares northward and from the channell westward lieth the way to Macau I set not down this course for that I haue shewed it in an other place in the Nauigation from Malacca to China if you passe betwéen these Ilands you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand to find the depthes From Macau â— miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland with a very high sharp point which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of CantoÌ„ through the which y e great Iuncoâ— that is the Spanish shippes for marchandise doe passe where our ships I meane the Portingals may likewise passe through and on the West point of this Iland halfe a mile southward lieth certaine stone Cliffes betwéen the which and the Iland it is al déep faire ground as also along by the Iland on the south side beyond these stony cliffes to seaward there lieth certaine smal Ilands and beyond these Ilands somewhat further to seaward there lieth other great Ilands but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands but betwéen the smal the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare From Macau 4. miles southeastward lieth a great and high Iland being deuided in â— parts by a small running water out of the sea a farre off sheweth like a ship hauing neither trees nor bushes and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land there is an other long Iland with trees in the middle of the channel between these 2. Ilands in the entrie thereof on the side of Macau lyeth a rock or cliffe which the water washeth ouer which you must shunne for all the rest is fair and good way From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts 6. miles Eastsouth east lyeth an other long high Iland with a very black shining wood of trees called ToÌ„quion and froÌ„ thence half a mile to seaward lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes you must run betwéene them and the land where it is faire ground or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands from this Ilande aforesaid to the land about a myle or thereabouts distant from it lyeth an other low long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell betwéene these 2. Ilands there lieth an Iland or cliffe and an other by the Iland that lieth by the land betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell the Iland that lieth to seaward it is déepe faire and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward on the land side there is a small créeke or bay where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds and there is likewise good fresh water rouÌ„d about this Iland Tonquion it is all faire ground but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton from the west point of the same Iland â— or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Iland which reacheth northwest Southeast is altogether without trées or bushes from the Southeast point of the same Iland half a mile to seaward lyeth an other round high Iland and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good on the northeast side of this great Iland from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloueÌ„ Ilands or rockes close by of a reddish earth without any trees betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland the land runneth a smal channel through the which the small Bancoins which are the Chinish barkes or lighters doe passe From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon From this round Iland from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast the land hath a point with a high and eueÌ„ land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes hauing on the Westsouthwest side a still stéepe land and on the Eastnortheast side it is all Valleyes From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea and right against this point about the length of a harquebuse shot there lyeth a great long Iland reaching as the coast doth The channell betwéene this point and the Iland aforesaid is scarse 3. fadome déep within the poynt towardes the land on the Westsouthwest syde there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China at 7. 8. fadome déepe muddie ground I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon came through the aforesaid smal channel here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton or the Ilands of Canton do end this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands to this poynt or hooke of land maketh a golfe by meanes of the great Creeke al this crosse way is faire and good and when it is any hard wether then there goeth a verie hollow water speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes From this poynt of the land aforesaid and the poynt of the Iland 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof on the eastnortheast side which are good defence against stormes foule wether there you haue victuails other necessaries and being â— miles to seaward there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe y t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle lying vnder 22. degr ½ this coast along by the sea is sandie strand inward béeing a high land it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land lying fifteene myles from the poynt Lamon you may anker al ouer and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles you must vnderstand that from the countrie lying at the end of the Ilands of Canton to the Iland Lamon 18. miles to seawarde there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes of red saÌ„d which at low water are vncouered in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage from the aforesaid point of land lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon to the Enseada dos Camoriins that is the creeke of Garnaet by the Chinaes called Caiâ—to lying full vnder 25 degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest and northeast and by north and southwest and by south without all the points and hookes it is in course 86. miles and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon are 15. miles and 10 miles from the
From thence to Xynaco are fiue myles From Xynaco to the Hauen of Vxymando are fiue myles From Vxymando to the Hauen of Muroo are fiue myles And this Hauen is about fiue myles more from the Hauen aforesaid Beyond the aforesaid point thrée or foure myles Eastward lyeth the Hauen of Fyongo and from thence sixe or seuen myles further is the Hauen and Bay of Sacay All this coast aforesaid is faire and cleare hauing all ouer anker ground These are as I said before all Portingale myles and two Iapon myles make iust a Portingall myle which is found to bée true by the Portingall Pilotes that haue therein taken the height of the Sunne and made their account after the Iapon myles The 32. Chapter The Nauigation from Lampaecon which lyeth by Macon in the coast of China to the Island of Iapon and from thence to the Island Firando with the description thereof by another Pilote SAyling from Lampacon to the Island of Iapon you must passe through the first issue or Channell of the South Island which reacheth South-eastward hauing a Cliffe or Island in the middle thereof betwéene the which and the point of the Island you must passe because of the scant winde making as neare as possiblie you can to the end of the Island alwayes with your Leade in hande And comming to the middle way of the Channell of the Island lying vnto Sea-warde you shall finde a sandie banke that in the middle hath not thrée fadome deepe You shall vse all the meanes you can to passe aboue a great and high Island which lyeth East Southeast from you Being about this Island with the other that lyeth to Sea-ward in the same rowe you shall passe along by the Island that lyeth to Seaward Six miles further from this Island you shall sée a row of Islands small Islands Cliffes and are nine reaching further out to seaward then all the rest that you passe by and lye North Northeast and South Southwest you cannot passe on the outside of them neither is it necessary but you must runne betwéene them and a great high Island full of Trées that lyeth to landward from you which Island as you come néere it sheweth as if it were round because you goe right vpon the point Notwithstanding it is long reaching as the coast doth Hauing past somwhat beyond it there is a channell that passeth betwéene it and another Island lying close by it Behind this last Island East Northeast there is a Hauen where some Ships come to lade certain Chinish wares and is not farre from the mouth or entry of Canton This Island aforesaid is by the Chinars called Tonquion From thence you shal runne East Northeast to sée the country that lyeth betwéene Chinchon and Chabaquon which is faire and cleare ground running two myles from it to shunne a Riffe that lyeth close by Chinchon which hath a round high Island lying close by the land you must runne the coast of Chaboqueo to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and northeast and by East and Southwest and by west and whē you are right against Chinchon then about two miles into the Sea you haue a high round Island and within the land a high hill with a stony rocke on the top thereof like Pulo Varella in the coast of Champa and the entry is through some Islands this round Island afore is by the Chinars called Toanthea When you are right against Chincheo as aforesaid then runne East Northeast vntill you are eight or ten myles from the coast to kéepe without all the Islands and being there then runne Northeast in which course you shall see the Island of Lequeo Pequeno that little Lequeo lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées it is a very high and long island about eightéen miles distant from the coast of China when you are past Lequeo Pequeno comming into fiue and twenty degrees and ½ If you desire to make to the land of Bungo then runne Northeast and Northeast and by East in which course you shall fall vpon the Islands lying on the South side of the Island Tanaxuma which Islands begin at 29 degrées and ½ and reach to thirtie degrées and ½ and are in all seuen high and small Islands which reach one with the other that is the thrée first Islands Northeast and southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South the other thrée East Northeast and West Southwest and one at the end of them North and South These seuen Ilands being past six miles further North northeast you shal sée two other ilands lying east and west with each other wherof the East island is the smallest the East end thereof hauing a high houell which descendeth eastward making a low point You may well passe betwéene these two islands for there is a good channell The greatest of these two islands which is high and long is called Icoo from the east point whereof foure or fiue miles Northward lyeth the island of Tanaxuma which is a long island reaching North and south of seuen or eight miles long In the middle way of the same island on the East side lieth the Hauen which is a small Créeke within certaine stony cliffes but it is not best to put into it West Northwestward from this Hauen about a mile and a halfe there lyeth a smal flat land that hath a houell in the middle seuen or eight myles Northward from Tanaxuma you shall sée a great high land which reacheth tenne miles east and West which is the land of Iapon and at the end or point of this coast on the West side lieth the Creeke of Cangoxuma and the hauen of Amango aboue it hauing a high pointed top and right against the island of Tanaxuma North and North and by East lyeth the Créeke of Xebuxy that is very great hauing within it the Hauens of Minato Eoxima and Xaboxy all thrée Riuers for small Ships And lying on the East side on the right hand as you come West-ward into the Créeke sixe or seuen myles further North Northeast along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Tanora which is the least Hauen of Iapon If you desire to put to the said hauen of Tanora then you shall holde close to the shoare sayling néere vnto it for it is faire ouer all but you haue no anker ground nor Roades because it is déepe and when you passe by it being beyond the Créeke of Xebury then you shall come to a small Créeke which at the first sight séemeth to haue good harbour but being right against it it sheweth what it hath that is many stones and rockes reaching somewhat inward to land I note it here because thereby no man should deceiue himselfe Being past this small Créeke you presently see a great thicke and high point of land From this point y e land windeth inward where you shall see a sandie strand and two Islands with Trées lying there along At the end of the which Islands there are other smaller
Islands and Cliffes and a great Créeke At the issue of the Straight of Arima sixe miles forward lyeth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima which is a great high land hauing on the Sea side close by it foure or fiue Islands or cliffes and betwéene this Island and the Firme land there is a good harbour and in the same Island there is a village with many people with a good small Créeke or Hauen where many Fisher boats Foists doe lie from thence begin the Islands of Firando From this Island Cambexima fiue or sixe miles forward there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffes that reach from the land into the sea you must run to the same point northwestward This way from Cambexima to the aforesaide point of land is all one créeke because the land windeth inward and because that on this coast of Iapon commonly at such time as you goe thither it is cloudie mistie weather therefore you can hardly discerne the scituation of the land but if it be cléere weather you shall presently see the point sticking out that hath the Island and Cliffes at the end thereof but if it be cloudie and mistie weather then you must not saile along the coast but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid when you are hard by it you shall presently discouer all the Islands and cliffes The furthest to seaward of these Islands cliffes are two Islands separated from each other betwéene high and lowe and longer then round wholly without Trées and that which lyeth furthest to seaward hath two riffes reaching out from it one lying Eastward the other West Northwest about halfe a myle by the East Iland of these aforesaid two Islands as I was tolde if is faire and good ground close to it as it séemeth to be And vpon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the South windes and if you haue occasion you may anker there From these aforesaide two Islandes to the lande there lyeth two Islandes or Cliffes in forme like two Pillars betweene these Cliffes and another Channell which the Islands begin to open before you many Iuncos or Chinish shippes doe passe laden with merchandises to Fâ—rando and the Hauen of Vmbra notwithstanding you shall leaue all these Islands or Cliffes on the East side or your right hand running about halfe a mile to Seaward from them and béeing right ouer-against these Islands then three or foure miles further in the same course of North Northwest there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land being a high and flat land on the top and in the first appearance it séemeth like three Islands although it is but one for it hath two broken partes and by that meanes maketh a shewe of thrée Ilands From the point of this Island thrée miles Westward to seaward you shall see a round Island hauing close by it a long small Island and if it be cléere weather West Southwest or West you shall see the Island of Goto which is very high and great with many rentes and clouen peeces on the toppe being all euen and flat ground When you sée the Island aforesaid that sheweth like three Islandes then runne straight vpon the point thereof that sticketh outward and if the tide chance to be against you with slatâ—e winde then the water by this point sticking out of the aforesaid Iland maketh a great roaring and hath much scumme so that it séemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh vpon notwithstanding it is all ouer faire and deepe therefore you may fréely put towards it without feare keeping a little from the point and in this manner passing about the point then you must saile along where you haue a great and good creeke where you shall put in till you find ten or eleuen fadome deepe it is hard ground where you may anker at pleasure it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson and being there you shall presently haue Barkes and Foâ—stes enough aboord your shippe that will bring you to Firando In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Rode to anker with good harbour for all winds Likewise the length of the shotte of a great péece Northeastwarde lieth another Hauen that hath a good harbour for all winds wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Rode aforesaid If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you feare any foule weather then you may fréely lie in any of these Hauens where you lie safe from rouers and théeues that may come thither This Iland that seemeth to be thrée is called Faquyn and from thence to the Iland Firando are fiue miles From this Iland Faquyn if it be cléere weather you may well sée the Iland of Firando Northward from it but because for the most part you there find cloudie and mistie weather there is no certaintie but from the hauen where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Iland with some stonie rockes about it about halfe a mile from the rode of the aforesaid coast where you lie which reacheth North Northeast and North by West about two miles and a halfe from you you shall sée another long high and flatte Iland clouen in the middle and so sheweth to be two Ilands stretching East and West About halfe a mile from this iland lieth a great round Cliffe betwéene this Cliffe and the round Ilande that lyeth halfe a mile from the Hauen of the aforesaid Iland there is a great créeke which maketh a chanell through the which you passe to the Hauen of Vmbra and when you sée the Island that sheweth like two Ilands runne right vpon it to the Hooke or end thereof lying in the East to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow as also by the great Cliffe that lyeth Eastward from you running inward then you shall sée a verie long land which is the coast that maketh the strait or channell betwéene the land and the Iland of Firando you must shunne all the land that lieth on the East side for it is all ouer foule ground as you passe about by the aforesaid Iland which is called Caroxyma leauing it on the West side about the length of the shot of an arrowe from the ende thereof you shall sée two Islandes whereof that Westwarde is long the other lying right before you béeing rounde hauing a stonie Cliffe which you must shunne and then presently you shall sée two other Cliffes which shall all lie Westward from you and béeing there you shall sée the Island of Firando lying before you being about two small miles from you you may fréely make towardes it for it is all ouer faire and passe aboue the coast of the Firme lande that lieth Eastward When you are by the Islands and cliffes then there are certaine small Channels which you shall shunne kéeping close
which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon If you faile of it at sometime it is not often it commeth and beginneth from one point and so runneth with a continuall storme almost about all the points in compasse blowing most stiffely whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande and in such sort that not any stormes throughout all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it and to chuse your times that by calmes sodainely you bee not vnaduisedly ouertaken as euery man that hath sayled those wayes can sufficiently showe you and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa then runne Northeast by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima which is a good way and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side and haue seuentie fiue fadome water then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma and hauing lesse depth then your course is not good but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better but being too loofeward it is good especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare which is a smal Island on the Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes and somewhat farther forward the Island Coâ—aquyn which is very great being deuided into thrée parts I haue passed by the land side thereof which is a very good way and there you néede not feare any thing but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island which you may easily perceiue for the Sea breaketh vpon them You must holde your course along by it leauing the stones on the larboorâ— side about the length of the shot of a Base from you and when you are past them then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea thereby to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer against the thicke and great Lande for betwéene them and it it is all full of Riffes And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa which is very great where the Créeke of Arima beginneth From thence North North westward from you you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma When you are right against Cabexuma somewhat beyond it you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side and then East-warde and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Sea side hath a great houell and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast which shew like two Ships vnder sayle Also further forward towards Firando there is two flat Islands lying along the coast called the Islands of Resting as that is the Islands of Riffes If when you come out of the Sea you haue cause to anker before you put into the Hauen being by the Islands or Cliffes then put out newe Cables making them fast that you loose not your ankers for there it is very déepe and sharpe Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos and when you are by it that is inward of the point You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water all the other Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque hauing nothing to feare then that you sée before your eyes for there you haue both Sea and ground as it is vpon the coast of Spaine The 36. Chapter A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe called the S. crus the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe lying East Southeast from thence but because the wind was so scant wee could not doe it so that we were forced to driue so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper being eightéene twenty fadome and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme that is the Island of the Harquebush This Island of Lanton as you make towards it hath a point where the wind fell very scarce in such manner that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward otherwise we had indured great labor and trouble to passe through the channell because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme the course wee held that night was East and East and by South because wee had a sharpe wind hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco or the white cliffe and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it The sixt of Iuly being Saterday we could not take the height of the sunne because it was right ouer our heads hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind with very hote weather by day but by night it was somewat colder we held our course East Northeast East and east and by North as the winde blewe and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground being in sight of lande and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of Lamon which is a long flat land like a Table or plaine field on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea and hard by against the thickest part thereof you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon to Seaward whereof lyeth thrée Cliffes Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon there wée call forth our Leade and found 27 fadome water with small white and some blacke sand with small shels among it being about seuen or eight miles from the
night at the depths of ninetéene twenty and two and twenty fadome with so clear bright a sky that almost all the night we saw the coast and when day began to appear we were somwhat beyond the Islands called Ruy Lobo and presently thervpon we saw the Island of Lamon there we beganne to haue certain stormes as I gesse it is from Ilhas de Ruy Lobo to the Island of Lamon ten miles by the Island of Lamon we saw the water shynne and burne to Seaward in such sort that wee passed close by the Riffe those that come from Iapon must first passe by the Island and then by the Riffe this Riffe lieth Northeast southwest and is dangerous for those that saile from Macau to Iapon we ran about thrée miles from it with a strong northeast and East Northeast winde so that wee made good way whereby it séemed we made fifty miles in one meale tide but the strēgth of y e water and streames against vs were so stiffe that we sailed but fiue and twenty myles in a mealetide This strong streame and stiffe water commeth as we were informed out of the Riuer of Tancoan and continueth till you be past the Island Branco being past it the streame runneth presently towards the Island Ilha de Leme which lyeth close by Macau from Lamon we ran West southwest and in truth we found the way from Lamon to Ilha Branco very short for by night wee stroke all our sayles and so lay driuing without sailes winding Southwest alwaies at the depths of fiue and twentie and six and twenty fadome water and at the midnight watch we began to hoise vp our maine saile and our foukesaile in that manner running West to get to twenty fadome deepe which is the middle of the chanell where we must passe through and in the morning we saw the Island Do Leme that is the Island of the harquebush lying somwhat on y e lareboord of vs. This Island Do Leme if you go east and West vpon it séemeth very small and the déeper you are within the channell the bigger it sheweth in the entry wherof on the right hand it hath two Islands or Cliffes and from thence forward the Islands begin to lye on a rowe till you come to Macau as I said in another place The 42. chapter An instruction and large declaration of the course from the Island Firando in Iapon to the coast of China the hauen of Macau with all the courses situations and stretchings of the same done by a Portingale Pilote HE that desireth to saile from the Island Firando to Macau or Canton in China as soone as he is out of the hauen of Firando if he hath time inough to get to the Island Guoto he must presently saile forward if not hée must anker about a mile from Firando at 28 fadome déepe where hee may prepare himself and make fast his boat y t the next day in the morning he may set saile As soon as you are set out from Firando to follow on your course you must runne along by the land of Firando till you bee at the end thereof and as you run south west vntil you be by the land you shal hold somwhat néerer south-west and then on your West side there will bee 3. or 4. Islands and passing by the formost of them southward you shall presently sée the channell that runneth betwéen that Island and the Island Guoto and through it you must passe By this channel there lieth another Island betwéen the which and the Island Guoto you must likewise passe when you are through and out of this Channell and that the Islands westward from you then you must runne along by Guoto vntil you are past it to seaward so to kéepe on further your course and if in passing through the channel the wind chanceth to be still you may boldly anker therein close by the land of Guoto In this Island Guoto are very good Hauens which passe through and through againe therfore it is not one Island but deuided into foure parts Whē you are two myles from Guoto you must hold your course West Southwest vntill you are past the two Islands one called Xuma y e other Meaxuma which are eight myles distant from the Island of Guoto Being past those Islands you must run Southwest néerer south from the aforesaid Islands there is another Island called Meaxuma which you must likewise passe by by those Islands aforesaid it is all faire way without any trouble neither yet by the Island this Island lyeth vnder 31 degrées and 1 ◠You must run betwéene the Island and the smal Islands and whē you are past them the Island of Guoto then you must runne Southwest southwest and to south When you are past this and the other Islands running southwest as aforesaid you shal goe right vpon the point of Cabo de Sumbor which lieth on y e coast of China vnder 28 degrées ◠◠and if it be clear weather y t you there desire to know the land you may well doe it if not then put not too neer the coast because of the many Islands that lie all along by it for you must runne outward from it alwaies kéeping as far from it as you thinke néedefull that you may be frée from it and by night not to put in betwéene it for that all the coast from Cabo de Sumbor to Chinchon is nothing but Islands You must likewise sée that you put not too farre inward to Sea to kéepe close to the winds that blowe off the Land and to Sea-ward you haue the Islands of small Lequeo called Lequeo Pequeno and the Island of fishers which are distant from the Firme land about twenty miles if you haue a cléere night you may well passe along by the Islands yet with great foresight The most daungerous Island vpon that coast is the Island of Camaroyns which lyeth to Sea-ward out from all the rest I haue passed twice betwéene it and the Land it is an Island that is deuided in two partes by a rent or breach that is in it Foure myles forward beyond this Island lyeth a small Island which is flat and euen with the Sea hauing certain stones lying Northeastward from it but not many If you chaunce to passe by it in the night time you must bee carefull to auoid it for it is flat and little without any trées you must likewise shun the Island of Baboxyn which likewise lieth outward into the Sea in such sort that when you fall vpon it with good aduise and warely you may fréely passe by it for you néede feare nothing then what you see before you And when you are fiftéene myles from Cabo de Sumbor accounting from y e point of the firm land and not from the Islands lying by it thē you must hold your course Southwest and so run without all the Islands whereby you shall be out of danger of the Island
Lequeo Pequeno also y e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pequeno or before if it so fall out you must seeke to know the land for it is necessary for you to see it because of the Island Lamon as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by North and Southwest and by South but not much And when you are right ouer against Chinchon and that by marking the land or by the heigth of the sunne you know it being foure miles from the land you must hold your course southwest so to go without the Island of Lamon and if you desire to passe within the Islands you may well do it for it is faire ynough and you néede feare nothing But if you feare to mâ—e Lamon then it is better to runne as aforesaid for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon which is very dangerous There you must haue great foresight for when you are past Lamon then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon are called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo that is the Islands of Ruy Lobo from the which that which lyeth Northeast is the smallest the other being somewhat greater Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bushes from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y e ground from thence you shal run southwest and holde a little southwest and by South and if it be in the day time you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon from whence the said Riffe hath his issue reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course you shal make good way but if it be night you must looke well to your selfe And running the aforesaid course of Southwest you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon and doe 〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time and 〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉 â—sently make towards the 〈…〉 passe along by it From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the coâ— of 〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest and from thence East Northeast and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco which lyeth distant from the coâ—st about fiue miles vnder 22 degrees and â— right ouer against the creeke of Fuâ—â—da de Bona Ventura that is the creeke of good fortune you may passe close by the Island Branco both on the sea side as you thinke best and being past that Island 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan are fifty miles When you are past Ilha Branco then you must runne west Southwest from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie miles that is twelue miles before you enter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands and twelue miles from thence to Macau you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands which will be on the Northeast side of you and on the Southside it hath two Islands whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe and being ouer against those high bare Islands on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell which I neuer passed but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord and so running Southwest you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through although it sheweth narrow notwithstanding it is very good for I haue run into it by night you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you and runne in with the flood west west and by north and west Northwest and so you shall go right to Macau also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe And when you come from Iapon right ouer against the cape De Sumbor being fiftéen miles to seaward from it then cast out your lead and you shall find fortie and fiue fortie fadome water muddy ground with many streames of foule water and when you sée the land then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon which lie eight miles into the sea whereby you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags which the fishermen of that Countrey haue set vp for markes From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them lieth a town called Guara from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land and to know the Somes which are Chinish carnels and Barkes vsed in those countries they beare but one saile Now to make toward the Lande as you would you must runne West you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon that is the banke or marke of Chinchon is a high Lande lying along by the entry of Chinchon on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest stéeping downeward reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it from the which runneth a riffe of sand at lowe water being two fadome déepe reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece towards y e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry which in length reacheth East and West in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very lowe being there then you are close by it and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point and anker at four fadome muddy ground on the Northeast side lie certain Islands close by the Point of Laylo and two miles to Seaward from it you haue twenty fadome water y e water of that country being very blew from thence to Lamon 3. or 4. miles from the land you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome and being past Chinchon towards Lamon You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels being right ouer against Chinchon or towards the northeast pou shal find muddy ground with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome and right ouer against Lamon you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground The 43. Chapter How you shall runne in out and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau with all the markes signes and tokens thereof so to saile into the Hauen of Macau IF you desire to saile out of Macau you must vnderstand y t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil and presently after towards the East you haue two houels which with the Hill of the white vlacke
behinde them and sailed but foure in companie that of Nuno da Silua béeing one till they came to the Baye called Baya de las Islas that is the Baye of the Islands lying vnder nine and fortie degrées where it is said that Magellanes lay and wintered there with his Shippe when hée first discouered the Straight which now holdeth his name In this Bay being the twentie of Iune they entred and there ankered so close to the land that they might send to it with a Harquebush shot and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians that were apparelled with skinnes with their legges from the knées downwarde and their armes from the elbows downward couered all the rest of their bodies béeing naked with bowes and arrowes in their handes being subtill great and well formed people and strong and high of stature where sixe of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water and before they leapt on land foure of the Indians came vnto their boate to whome the English men gaue bread and wine and when the Indians had well eaten and drunke they departed thence and going somwhat farre from them one of the Indians cryed to them and saide Magallanes Esta heminha Terra that is Magallanes this is my countrey and because the English men followed them it séemed the Indians fledde-vpward into the lande and béeing somewhat farre off they turned backe againe and with their arrowes slewe two of the English Shippers one being an English man the other a Netherlander the rest came backe againe and saued themselues in the boate wherewith they presently put off from the shoare and there they stayed till the seuentéenth of August vpon the which day they set saile running along by the coast about a mile and a halfe from the lande for there it is all faire and good ground at twentie and fiue and twentie fadome déepe and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Straightes but because the winde was contrarie they stayed till the foure and twentie of August before they entred The entrie or mouth of the Straight is about a myle broad on both sides béeing bare and flat land on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires but on the South side they saw no people stirring The foure and twentie day aforesaide they beganne to enter into the straights with an East Northeast wind This Straight may be about an hundred and ten miles long and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Straight and halfe way into it it runneth right forth without any windings or turnings and from thence about eight or ten miles towardes the end it hath some boughes and windings among the which there is one so great a hooke or running in that it séemeth to runne into the other land and there it is lesse then a mile broad from one lande to the other and from thence forwarde it runneth straight out againe And although you finde some crookings yet they are nothing to speake of The issue of the Straight lieth westward and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end then the Straight beginneth to be broader and it is all high lande to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Straight for the first eight myles after you enter is low flat land as I saide before and in the entrie of the Straight you finde the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea and after they began to saile in with the East Northeast winde being entred they passed along without any let or hinderance either of wind or weather and because the high land on both sides lay couered with snow and that all the Straight is faire and cleare they held their course a Harquebush shot in length from off the North side hauing nine and ten fadome déepe with good ground as I said before where if neede require a man may anker the hilles on both sides béeing full of trées some of the hilles and trées reaching downe to the sea side in some places hauing plaine and euen land and there they saw not any great riueâ—s but some small riuers that issued out of the Riffes and Breaches of the lande and in the country where the great Bough or crooking is on the South side they saw certaine Indian Fishermen in their Canoas or Scutes being such as they sawe first on the North side but more people they saw not on the South side Beeing out of the Straight on the other side béeing vpon the sixt of September of the aforesaide yeere they held their course Northwest for the space of thrée dayes and the third day they had a northeast winde that by force draue them West Southwest which course they helde for the space of ten or twelue dayes with fewe sailes vp and because the winde began to be verie great they tooke in all their sailes and lay driuing till the last of September The foure and twentie day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of their pinnace which was about an hundred tunne then againe they hoised saile because they came better holding their course Northeast for the space of seuen dayes and at the end of the said seuen dayes they had the sight of certaine Islands which they made towards for to anker but the weather would not permit them and béeing there the winde fell Northwest whereby they sailed West Southwest The next day they lost the sight of another of their companie which ship was about three hundred and sixtie tunnes for it was very foule weather so that in the end the Admirals shippe was left alone for the Ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Baye where they wintered before they entred into the Straights and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen fiftie degrees where they entred into a Hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great peece from the land at twentie fadome deepe where they staied thrée or foure dayes and the winde comming Southward they hoysed anker holding their course Northward for the space of two dayes and then they espied a small vnhabited Island where béeing arriued they stroke sayles and hoised out their boat and there they tooke many birds and Sea wolues The next day they set saile againe holding their course North Northeast and North to â—nother Island lying fiue or six myles from the firme lande on the North side of the Straight where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the lande at twelue fadome water This Island is small and lowe lande and full of Indians the Island being altogither built and inhabited by them where they hoysed out their boate wherein the Admirall and twelue English men were entred going to fetch fresh water and to séeke for victuals and beeing landed vpon the Island the Indians in exchange of other things brought two Spanish shéepe and a little Mais
much different and from the matter taken in hand Touching the orientall parts neuerthelesse because it is vnknowne to our countrimen as also commonly sailed by the Portingales and Spaniards whose voyages and trauels I haue herein onely set downe it will not bee out of the matter but rather very necessary to be ioyned therevnto and as I thinke will bee wel accepted and esteemed off insomuch as that at this time our countrey men doe vse to Trafficke and trauell into those countries hoping it will bee an occasion of further increasing and augmenting of their trauels to the honour praise and glory of the Gospell of Christ and all Christian Princes and to the entiching and welfare of the Low countries The 65. Chapter The Nauigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Hauens of Brasilia to the Riuer called Rio de la Plata with the situation thereof SAyling from Cabo Verde that is the greene point to Brasilia you must saile south southeast Southeast and Southeast by South and being vnder fiue or sixe degrées or wheresoeuer you bee you shall take your degrées on the Southside and lessen them as much as you can and you must remember that as soone as you haue the generall winde blowing from the South-east then you shall runne Southwest and West Southwest and if the winde bee South and Southwest you must runne South-east but not too farre for it helpeth you not for that the more you kéepe that course the more way you loose and you shall vse all the meanes you can not to runne vnder the coast of Guinea nearer then sixtie or seuentye fadome from the Sandes called Os Baixos de Sant Anna for the winde will helpe you in such manner that you may sayle towards the Point of Brasilia And if with this course you will sayle to Pernanbuco It being from the Moneth of October forward and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de Noronha being vnder eight eight degrées and ½ You must runne West towards the Lande and if you sée Lande vnder eight degrées they will bee white downes and then you are on the North-side from whence you shall put to the South that is from October forward for as then the Northeast and east Northeast winds doe blowe and if you bee vnder the degrées aforesaid you shall see the said downes and when you see the end of them on the South-side and from thence not séeing any more then you are by Capigâ—aramirini and from thence to Pernanbuco are fiue or sixe myles And so if you bee vnder eight degrées and a halfe then you shall sée a flat Lande till you bee at tenne and twelue fadome déepe and the Lande on the Sea side will bee euen bare which is called Capiragua when you are East and West with this Lande being the Countrey whereof I speake at twelue fadome déepe it beeing in the Moneths of October or after Februarye then you néede not feare any thing but take héed you put not southwards for you must take héede of the Cape of S. Augustine and Northward you shal sée another point called A Punta d Olynda where the Towne of Olynda lieth and the coast of the same North Point is sailed North and South If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine then you shall sée a Hill inward to the land which sheweth like the backe of a Cammell on the Southside hauing thrée Houels along by the Sea side and the coast will stretch North-east and Southwest From this point of S. Augustine to the towne of Olynda Northward are twelue miles This point lyeth vnder 8 degrées and ½ and Olynda lyeth vnder 8. degrées and â…“ Pernanbuco vnder eight degrées this voyage is thus to bee sayled when you set sayle from Lisbon in the Moneths of October and Nouember But when you saile from Lisbon in February or March then you shall looke for land vnder nine degrées for from y e month of March forward then the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow and if you chance to bee by the land vnder the height aforesaid you néede not feare any thing but shall hold your course at seuentéene and eightéene fadome for it is faire and cléere and you haue nothing daungerous but the riffes lying close by the land whereon you sée the water breake running Northward if you finde certaine downes along by the sea side then feare not to run northward for therby you shal sée the point of S. Augustine This point lieth on the sea side being euen stéepe land shewing like the muzzell of a Whale in the toppe hauing a round Hill compassed with Trées and being at the depth aforesaid close by the Land you shall sée a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus From this Island to Cape S. Augustine are fiue or sixe miles and lyeth vnder 8 degrées ¾ The 57. chapter The course and Nauigation to the Hauen called A Bahia de todos os Santos or of all Saints in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to sayle to the Bahia de todos os Santos that is the bay of all Saints then obserue the course aforesaied taking the times of the yeare From the Month of March forward and from October as I said before This Bay of all Saints lyeth vnder thirteene degrées and being from October forward then you shall looke for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½ and being in sight thereof which will bee white sandy strands which shew like linnen that lieth too white then you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast vntill you be at the end of the said strands where you shall sée an Island lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Hauen called Tapoon From thence you runne along the coast West and West and South And comming to this Bay from the Month of March forward then you must not passe aboue 13 degrées and 1 â— Southward and when you are in sight of Land if it be not the aforesaid white strand then you shall vse all the means you can to run Northward and when you sée the sandye strand at 12 degrées and ½ Then you shall sée a hill standing along by the seaside and if you chance to be so néere the lande that you can find no meanes to get off from it then you shall know the Land well for on the sea side you shall sée a round houel called O Morro de san Paulo from the which houell to the bay are twelue myles along by this houell on the northwest side there is a very great riuer called Tinhare which is very good to put into if néed be and is six and seuen fadome déep and when you are at the aforesaid Point vnder 13 degrées ½ then put not to the Lande for it hath a créeke that is very dangerous And if you desire to saile from the Bay of
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
teates of a womans dugs and to put into it you must keepe your course along by the houell If you depart from the Point aforesaid with the winds called Brisas then you shall hold your course to the Cliffes called â—ortugas that is the Torteaux as winde serueth and you must see what depth you find for if there you finde fortie fadome water then you are on the South-side thereof and finding 30. fadome then you are East and West right against it and being at any of these depths you shal hold your course South South-west vntil you see the land which you shall discouer from the field or Hauen thereof and if you see a Land that is somewhat high hauing some Hils and Dales that shewe like the fingers of a mans hand then it is the land â—aâ—â—d Narugo from thence you shal runne to Hâ—eaâ—a holding your course along by the coast Sayling out of Hauana to the Martirs you shall hold your course Northeast by the which course you shall see the Point which is three small Islandes whereof that in the middle is the greatest the vttermost being the East coast and the inwardest the North-east and South-west coast From thence North-east-ward to the Cape De Canauerales that is y e point of Reedes the coast stretcheth North and South and North-east-ward you shall see no land and being vnder fiue and twentie degrees then you are in the mouth of the channel which to passe through you must hold your course Northeast and if you see not the Cape de Canauerales being vnder 28. degrees and â— 2. then you are without the channell Sayling out of the Hauana with the windes called Brisas to the channell you must runne outwards till it be noone and after noone you shall make to Landward that towards euening you may bee by it and to vse the Windes called Terreinhos which are Windes that blowe by night from off the land running in this manner along by the coast vntill you bee North and South with the Houell called El Pan de Matancas that is the loafe of Matancas being North and South with y e same loafe you must runne Northeast if the winde will permit if not you must put to the coast of Florida where the winde will driue you doing your best in that way to goe out of your course as little as you may for the streames runne with great force towards that Lande and when you thinke it time then you shall put to the other side as the winde will leade you till you see the Lande and when you sée it then winde in this sort running through and being vnder 28. degrées and ½ then you are out of the Channell hereof I aduise that the strikes you make in lauering towards the land of Florida must be short and those towardes the Coast of Minare long for the streames driue you to the Lande of Florida The Hils of Chupiona come out by the loafe of Matancas and are certaine not too high and euen Hils flat on the toppe with certaine white shining houels The loafe of Matancas is a high Houell flat aboue stretching northeast and South-west and on both sides as well North-eastward as southwestward it hath two low Points lower then y e said loafe which shew like the heads of Torteaux On the North-east side the Lande stretcheth lowe and from thence Northward it maketh a small Point Behinde this Point lyeth the Hauen of Matancas and to enter therein you must run Northeast and Southwest right against the said loafe and then the Hauen will bee South from you and you must runne southward to it it is a great Bay and there you haue no Road but close by the Land comming out you leaue the loafe on the South-side and you must hold your course north-east till you be out And being out of the Channell if it bée in Winter you shall run East wherwith you shall holde East and by North by the winding or declining of the compasse By the which course you shall passe on the South-side of the Islands and Cliffes of Bermuda and this course you shall holde till you bee vnder the heigth of the Island Fayael one of the Flemish Islands which is a great Island stretching North-west and Southeast on the Southeast side hauing a thicke Land and on the northeast side somewhat lower land To saile from thence to the Island of Tercera you shall hold your course outward of the Island of S. George east and east by North. The Island of S. George is a high Lande stretching East and West as also Tercera which on the Southside hath a clouen hill called O Brasil and a little eastward from thence there lieth thrée cliffes The Iland of S. Michael is a great high Island stretching East and West on the West side being lowe and on the East side high It hath likewise a clouen hil lying at the end on the East side This Island lyeth vnder 38. degrées The 64. Chapter The course and right markes from the Island La Desseada to the lande and coast of Carthagena Nombre de Dios new Spain and from the channell of Hauana IF you desire to sayle through the Channell that runneth betwéene the Island La Antigua La Desleada towards the coast you must holde your course West to the Island of Montecerratte running along by the Island of Guadalupe which is an Island clouen through the middle higher on the West then on the East side The Island La Antigua that is the old Island you shal find on the Northside of Guadalupe stretching in length East and West and hath Hils with outward shew like Ilands and lieth vnder 16. degrées and 1 â— The markes of the Island Montecerratte are these It is round and high like the Island La Gomera in the Canaries and hath some Hilles with certaine Water beakes Sailing from this Island Montecerratte you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the Island Sancta Crus but you must not runne too close by it for there it is foule and no cleare ground it stretcheth East and West and is Hilly but not verie high beeing higher on the West then on the East side in the middlest hath a rent or partition and on the East side there is a Roade where you may anker for there it is faire sandye ground To sayle from Sancta Crus to the Island of Puerto Riquo that is the Iland of the rich Hauen on the Southside you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the hill called Sierta de Loquillo and from thence to Cabo Roxo you shall sayle West and West and by North keeping along by the land vntill you be by the cape aforesaide which is the vttermost part of the same Island This point called Cabo Roxo that is the red point is a thin and lowe lande on the sea side hauing certaine redde shining downes and on the North-west side you sée the hils called I as Sierras de
of Spain and from the same flat land it is higher for it is 7. miles long now to put into this Iland you must hold your course on the northeast point being close by it within a stones cast you néed not fear for ther it is 15. fadom deepe and within it is all faire ground this is the road on the side of the Iland close by if from this Iland to the firme land there is no more but a quarter of a mile and you cannot see the entrie till you be hard by it and if there be any ships within the hauen you shall see them before you can discerne or know the Iland which sheweth as if it were trees y t stand vpon the land the farthest point outward on the northeast side of this Iland lieth vnder 9 deg therefore deceiue not your selfe by the card for some of them haue it vnder 9. deg and others vnder 9 deg and a halfe therfore beleeue none but such as haue it vnder 9. deg at the northeast end of the aforesaid IlaÌ„d Hereafter followeth the degrees and hightes of all the principal hauens riuers points Ilands places of the Nauigations of the Portingals Spaniards in the countries by them discouered and part inhabited each place with their right names and surnames as they are by them called and ordinarily named in their Seacardes First from the furthest point outward of Portingale called Cabo de Finisterra following along by the coast of Portingale Spain Barbary to the line of Tropicus Caueri and from thence along the Coast of Guinea to the Equinoctiall lyne The degrees on the north side of the line CAbo de Finisterra that is the point of the lands end lieth vnder degrees 43 The Ilandes of Bayona lie vnder 42. Porto de Portug y t is Porte port ly vn 41 As Berlengas y t is the Barles ly vnder 40. Lisboa or LisboÌ„ y t IlaÌ„d of tercera vn 29. Perseueira and the Iland of S. Michael lieth vnder 38. Cabo de san Vincente and the Iland santa Maria lie vnder 37. Trastalgar lying on the coast is vnder 36 Larache lyeth vnder 35 Soneia lyeth vnder 34. Cabo de Canty Porto santo y t is the holy haueÌ„ lying by the IlaÌ„d of Madera are vn 33 Rio dos saueis y t is y e riuer of faries is vn 32 The Iland of Madera or the Iland of wood is vnder the same heights of 32 Taffatama lieth vnder 31 Mecca and Ilha dos Saluaes that is the Iland of the wilde men lyeth vnder 30 Cabo de non and the Ilandes Palma and Lancarotte being of the Ilands of Canarie lyeth vnder 29 A Ilha or the Ilande de Forte Ventura lyeth vnder 28 Cabo de Boâ—ador and the Ilandes of great Canarie and also A Ilha de Hierro or Iland of Iron lyeth vnder 27 Angra dos Cauallos that is the Hauen of horses lieth vnder 25 Rio d'Ouro or y e riuer of Gold lieth vnd 24 The line or Tropicus Cancri Angra or the open hauen of Goncalo de Sintra lyeth vnder 23 Cabo das Barbas or the point of Baerden lyeth vnder 22 Cabo Branco or the white point lieth vn 21 Rio de Sao Ioâ—o or the riuer of S. Iohn lieth vnder 20 Furna de Santa Maria or the caue of S. Marie lyeth vnder 19 Sete monte or seuen hils vnder the Ilands of S. Anna S. Vincent S. Lucia and S. Nicolas lieth vnder 18 Ante Rotte and Ilha de Sal. or the Iland of Salt vnder 17 Rio or the Riuer of Canaga and the Iland Ilha de Maâ—a vnder 16 Cabo verde or the gréen point the IlaÌ„ds of S. Iago and Ilha do Fogo or of fyer vnder 15 Rio or the riuer of Gambia vnder 14 Rio das Ostras or the riuer of oisters vn 13 Cabo Roxo vnder 12 Buguba vnder 11 Rio do Pichel or the riuer of y e Can vnd 10 Rio or the riuer of Cachecache vnder 9 Rio de Serra Lioa or the riuer of the Lions hill vnder 8 Rio das Palmas or the riuer of Palms vn 7 Cabo de monte or the point of the hill vn 6 Cabo dos Baixos or the point of sands and the myne of S. George vnder 5 A Ilha or the IlaÌ„d of Fernando Poa Cauo dà s Palmas or point of Palmes vnder 4 Rio de Campo or the riuer of the field vn 3 Rio de Princepe or y e riuer of y e prince vnd 2 The Iland of S. Thomas vnder 1 From the Equinoctiall line to the south side following the coast of Congo Angola and Ethiopia to the cape de Bona Speranza The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial lyne CAbo or the point of Lopo Gonsalues vnder deg 1 Cabo or the point of Catharina vnder 2. Angra da Iudia or the hauen of the Iewe vnder 5. Praya de San Domingos or the straÌ„d of S. Dominico vnder 6. Rio or the riuer of Congo vnder 7 A Ilha d' Ascention or the ascention vnd 8. Rio or the riuer of Angola and the Iland of Loanda vnder 9 Cabo Ledo vnder 10. Rio or the riuer of S. Lazaro vnder 11. Cabo de Loubos or y e riuer of wolues vn 12 Monte Negro or the black hill vnder 14 Serra Parda or the gray hill vnder 15 Angra das Aldeas or the open hauen of the villages the Iland of S. Helena vnd 16. Manga das Areas or the sandy sleue vn 17. Cabo Negro or the blacke point vnder 18. Os Mendoins vnder 19 A Serra de S. Lazaro or Hill S. of Lazaro vnder 20. Praya or the straight of Ruy Pires vnd 21. Cabo do Padrao or the point of Colosso or Colume vnder 22. Praia Fria or the cold strand vnder 23. The lyne or Tropicus Cancri Ponta da concepsao or the conceptioÌ„ vn 24 Praya das Ala-goas vnder 25. Feiaco da Boca or the maÌ„ner of the mouth vnder 26. Angra or the hauen of S. Anthony vnd 27 Angra or hauen of S. Thomas vnder 28. Angra or the haueÌ„ of S. Christopher vn 29 Rio do Infante or the Riuer of the Kinges sonne vnder 32. Angra or hauen of S. Helena vnder 33. As Ilhas or IlaÌ„d of Tristan de CuÌ„ha v. 34. Cabo de Bona Speranza or poynt of good hope vnder 34. ½ From the cape de Bona Speranza northwards along the coast to Soffala Mosambique and Melinde to the Equinoctial lyne all being on the south side of the same lyne CAbo das Agulhas or the poynt of the Compas full vnder 35. Cabo de Infante or point of the kings sonne vnder 34. ½ Cabo Talhado or the clouen point vnd 34. Cabo das Vaccas or point of cowes Baya Fermosa or the faire bay vnder 34. Cabo de Areciffe or the point of the Cliffe vnder 33. Rio de infante or point of y e kings son v. 32. Ponta Primeira or the first point vnder 32. Terra do Natal vnder 31.
Ponta or the point of S. Lucia vnder 28. Terra dos fumos or the laÌ„d of smok v. 27. ½ Rio d' Alagoa or riuer of the lake and the Iland of Ioan de Lisboa vttermost south point of the Iland of S. Laurence vnd 26. Agoa de Boa Pas or y e riuer of peace vnd 25 Cabo das correntes or point of the streame vnder 24. ½ Rio or riuer of Mataca or monument the Iland A Ilha do Mascharenhas vn 21. ½ Os Baixos da Iudia or y e Iewes sands vn 22 Cabo or the point of S. Sebastian vnd 21. Rio or the Riuer of Quiloan or Quiloane vnder 20. ½ Soffala and the Iland of Diego Rodrigues vnder 20. Porto or the hauen of Bango vnder 19. ½ Rio or the riuer of Cuama vnder 18. ¼ Os Baixas dos Garaâ—aus or sands of Sea-mewes vnder 18. Rio dos bons sinais or of good tokens v. 17 ¼ A Ilha or Iland of Brandao vnder 17. The Iland A Ilha Primeira or the first Iland vnder 17. ½ A Ilha or Iland of Iohn de Noua vnd 16. ½ Rio or riuer of Angoxa vnder 16. Mosambique vnder 15. Rio de S. Antonio vnder 14. Rio dereito or the straight line vnder 12. Ilha do Comoro vnder 11. Cabo del Gado or thinne point vnder 10. The towne of Quiloa vnder 9. A Ilha de Monfia vnder 7. Ilha de Sansibar vnder 6. Ilha de Pemba vnder 5. A Ilha dos tres Irmaos or Iland of three brethren vnder 4. A Ilha do Almirante or the Iland of the Admirall vnder 3. ½ Mombassa or riuer of Tacharigo vnder 3. The howne and hauen of Melinde vnder 2. The towne and hauen of Pate vnder 1. The Equinoctial lyne The heigth and degrees of the Hauens points and riuers of the Equinoctiall lyne to the straights of Mecca otherwise called the red sea on the North side of the Equinoctiall The degrees on the north side Barra Boa or the good hauen vnder 1. The town and hauen of Braba vnder 2 The town haueÌ„ of Magadoxa vnder 2. ½ Zarzella vnder 6. Cabo or poynt of Guardafu and the Iland a Ilha de Sacotora vnder 12. From the point of Guardafu inwardes to the red sea on the south coast MIte or Barbora vnder 11. Zeila vnder 12. Ilha Dalaca vnder 15. Ilha Soaquen vnder 18. From the North side of the red sea or the straight of Mecca TOor vnder 27. Gida and the hauen of Mecca where Mahomet lieth buried whereof the straight taketh the name vnder 20. A Ilha de Zeyban vnder 15. A Ilha Camaram vnder 15. Adem a fortresse of the Portingales which in times past they held but not at this time vnder 13. The coast of Arabia to the straightes or Sinus Persicus and the Iland of Ormus FArtaque lieth vnder 15. degrees Diufar vnder 16. The Iland of Curia Muria vnder 17. The Iland a Ilha de Maeira vnder 22. Cabo de Rosalgate vnder 22. Curiata and Masquata vnder 23. Hoor vnder 24. Cabo Mocandao vnder 27. The Iland and towne of Ormus vnder 27. From Ormus or Persia along the coast to to the cape de Comoriin CAbo de Iasque vnder 25 ½ Rio do Sinde or Indo vnder 24. The towne and Iland of Diu vnder 21. Goga and the Towne within the Créeke of Cambaia vnder 33. The towne and hauen of Chaul vnder 19. The towne and hauen of Dabul vnder 18. The Iland and towne of Goa the Ilandes of os Ilhas Queimados vnder 16. The fortresse of Honor and the Ilandes of Angediua vnder 14. Baricala and the sandes of Baixios de Pandua vnder 13. The fortresse of Mangalor and Monte de Ly vnder 12. Cananor and Calecut vnder 11. Cranganor and Çochiin vnder 10. The fortresse of Cay Coulao vnder 9. Cauo de Comoriin being the vttermost point of the coast called India vnder 7. From the Iland Seylon on the East and south side about to the West TRincanamalle vnder 9 O. Capello de Frade or the Monkes coule vnder 8. Rio de Matacalou vnder 7 â— 3. Ponta de Gualle vnder 6. Cloumbo a fortresse of the Portingales vnder 7. From the Cape de Gomerin along the coast of Coramandel Orixa Bengala Pegu Malacca to the point of Singapura CAbo Negapatan vnder 11. degrées Pouoacao de Saint Thomas or towne of Saint Thomas vnder 13. 1 â— The towne and hauen of Muselepatao vnder 16. 1 â— The point of Guadouariin vnder 17. O Pagode de Iorganate or Idoll of Iurganate vnder 20. ¼ Rio de Puacota vnder 19. Rio Palura or Calauor vnder 19. â…“ A Derradiera terra alta or the last high land vnder 19. â…” Rio Cayegare vnder 21. Rio de Ganges otherwise Porto Pequeno or the small hauen vnder 22 The hauen and towne of Aracan vnder 20. The hauen and towne of Martaban vnder 16. ¼ The vttermost end on the north side of the Iland Andeman vnder 16. The vttermost end on the south side of the same Iland vnder 11. The hauen and Towne of Tanasseriin vnder 11 The hauen and towne of Gonsalan vnder 8. ½ The Iland Pulo Cuto vnder 6 â…” The towne and hauen of Queda vnder 6 ½ The Iland of Gomespola and the Iland Pulo Batum vnder 6. The Iland Pulo Pera vnder 5 â…” The Pulo Pinon vnder 5 2 4. The hauen and towne of Pera vnder 4. ½ Pulo Sambillao vnder 4. Pulo Parcelar the Iland as Ilhas d'Aru vnder 3. Cabo Rachado or clouen point vnder 2. ½ The towne and fortresse of Malacca vnder 2. ½ Cabo de Singapura vnder 1. From the Iland of Samatra on the North side of the Equinoctiall line THe hauen of Achein vnder 4. ½ The hauen of â—eder vnder 4. The point of Taniamburo vnder 5. The place on the south side of the Equinoctiall in the same Iland els where Terra d'Arruen or land of Arruen vnder 2. Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo or the gold land of Manancabo 3 The hauen of Campar vnder 4. The straight betwéene the Iland Sumatra and Iana Maior vnder 5. ½ A Ilha Iaua Maior in y e midle way vnd 6 A Ilha do Iogo or Fire Iland vnder 7. A Ilha Solitaria or the solitarie Iland vnder 7 A Ilha Banda vnder 5 The Ilandes of Cloues of Maluco are vnder the Equinoctiall lyne From Cabo de Singapura following the coast to Sion Camboia Champa and China to the riuer of Liampo Nanquyn with some Ilandes all vppon the North side of the Equinoctial line THe Iland Pulo Timao vnder 2. ½ The hauen and towne of Pan. vnder 3. 1 â— The hauen and towne of Patana vnder 7. â…” The Hauen and towne of Sion vnder 14 ½ The point of Cuy vnder 12. â…” Enseada de Lion or Creeke of Lyon vnder 12 ½ The hauen of Varella vnder 13 The Iland Pulo Condor vnder 8 â…” The towne and Hauen of Camboia vnder 10. The Iland Pulo Seciâ— from the land vnder 10. â…“ The Iland Pulo Caton vnder 15. â…” The Iland Pulo Champello
was called Coccolucio because such as were troubled therewith were no otherwise troubled then in the throat like vnto Hennes which haue the pip after the which followed many pestilent feuers with diuers strange fits which continued not aboue foure dayes Not long before the plague was so great in Portingale that in two yeres space there died in Lisbone to the number of 80. thousand people after the which plague the saide disease ensued which wrought great destruction throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine The fift day of August in the same yeare hauing some vnderstanding in the Spanish tongue I placed my selfe with a Dutch gentleman who determined to trauaile into Portingal to sée the countrie and with him stayed to take a more conuenient time for my pretended voyage Vppon the first of September following we departed from Siuill passing through diuers Townes and Villages within eight dayes after we ariued at Badaios where I found my other Brother following the Court. At the same time died Anne de Austria Quéene of Spaine Sister to the Emperour Rodulphus and Daughter to the Emperour Maximilian the Kings fourth and last wife for whom great sorrow was made through all Spaine her body was conuaied from Badaios to the Cloyster of Saint Laurence in Escuriall where with great solemnitie it was buried We hauing stayed certaine dayes in Badaios departed from thence and passed through a Towne called Eluas about two or thrée miles off being the first towne in the kingdome of Portingale for that betwéene it and Badaios the borders of Spaine and Portingale are limited from thence we trauailed into diuers other places of Portingale and at the last ariued at Lisbone about the twenty of September following where at that time wee found the Duke of Alua beeing Gouernour there for the King of Spaine the whole Cittie making great preparation for the Coronation of the King according to the custome of their countrie Wee beeing in Lisbone through the change of aire and corruption of the countrie I fell sicke and during my sicknes was seauen times let blood yet by Gods help I escaped and being recouered not hauing much preferment vnder the gentleman I left his seruice and placed my selfe with a Marchant vntill I might attaine to better meanes About the same time the plague not long before newly begunne began againe to cease for the which cause the King till then had deferred his enterance into Lisbone which wholly ceased vppon the first day of May Anno 1581 hee entred with great triumph and magnificence into the cittie of Lisbone where aboue all others the Dutchmen had the best and greatest commendation for beautiful shews which was a Gate a Bridge that stood vppon the riuer side where the King must first passe as hee went out of his Gallie to enter into the cittie being beutified and adorned with many costly and excellent thinges most pleasant to behold euery stréet and place within the cittie being hanged with rich clothes of Tapistrie and Arras where they made great triumphes as the manner is at all Princes Coronations The same yere the twelfth of December the Duke of Alua died in Lisbone in the kings pallace being high steward of Spaine who during his sicknes for the space of fourtéene dayes receaued no sustenance but only womens milke his body beeing seared and spicen was conuaied into his countrie of Alua The same month the King beeing yet at Lisbone died Don Diego Prince of Spaine and Portingale the kings eldest son his body béeing inbalmed was conuaied to Madril after whose death the king had but one Sonne named Don Phillip and two Daughters liuing About the same time there ariued at Lisbone the kings sister widdow to the deceased Emperour Maximilian and with her one of her daughters who beeing lame was after placed in a Monasterie of Nuns they with great triumph were likewise receaued into the cittie After the death of Don Diego the kings eldest sonne all the Lordes and States of Spaine and Portingale as well spirituall as temporal assembled at Lisbone and there in the kings presence according to the ancient custome and manner of the countrie tooke their oathes of faith and allegiance vnto Don Phillip the young Prince of Spaine and next heire and lawfull successor of the lung his Father in his dominions of Spaine Portingale and other landes and countries The next yeare Anno 1582. a great nauie of ships was prepared in Lisbone whose generall was the Marquesse de sancta Cruce accompanied with the principall gentlemen and captaines both of Spaine and Portingal who at their own costs and charges therein to shew the great affection and desire they had to serue their Prince sayled with the said Nauie to the Flemmish Ilandes to fight with Don Antonio that lay about those Iles with a Fléet of frenchmen whose Generall was one Phillip Strozzi These two Fléets méeting together fought most cruelly to the great losse of both parts yet in the ende Don Antonio with his French men was ouerthrowne and many of them taken prisoners among the which were diuers gentlemen of great account in France who by the Marquis commandement were all beheaded in the Island of Saint Michaels The rest being brought into Spaine were put into the Gallies Don Antonio himselfe escaped in a small ship and the General Strozzi also who béeing hurt in y e battail died of the same wound By this victory the Spaniards were so proud that in Lisbone great triumph was holden for the same and the Marquis de Sancta Crus receiued therin with great ioy which done and all thinges being pacified in Portingale the King left his Sisters sonne Don Albertus Cardinall of Austria Gouernour of Lisbone and the whole Countrie and with the saide Cardinals mother returned and kept Court at Madrill in Spaine The 2. Chapter The beginning of my voyage into the East or Portingale Indies STaying at Lisbone the trade of Marchandize there not beeing great by reason of the newe fresh disagréeing of the Spaniards and Portingales occasion being offered to accomplish my desire there was at the same time in Lisbone a Monke of S. Dominicks order named Don frey Vincente de Fonseca of a noble house who by reason of his great learning had of long time béene Chaplen vnto Sebastian King of Portingale who beeing with him in the battaile of Barbari◠where King Sebastian was slain was taken prisoner and from thence ransomed whose learning and good behauiour beeing knowne to the King of Spaine hee made great account of him placing him in his own Chappel and desiring to prefer him the Archbishopricke of all the Indies beeing voide with confirmation of the Pope he inuested him therewith although he refused to accept it fearing the long and tedious trauaile hee had to make thether but in the end through the Kings perswasion hee tooke it vpon him with promise within foure or fiue yeares at the furthest to recall him home againe and to giue him
in all India and the principall enemies that the Portingalles haue and which trouble them continually But the better to know the situation of the countrey you must vnderstande that all the coast seuered from India is the low land lying 8. or 10. miles vpon the coast which is that whereof we speake and is called Cuncam and then there is a high or hilly Countrey which reacheth almost vnto the skies and stretcheth from the one ende vnto the other beginning at Daman or Cambaia to the Cape de Comoriin and the vttermost corner of India and all that followeth again on the other coast called Ghoramandel This high land on the top is very flatte and good to build vpon called Ballagatte and Decan and is inhabited and diuided among diuers Kings and gouernors The inhabitants and natural borne countrimen are commonly called Decaniins and Canaras as in the description of Goa and the territories thereof shal be particularly shewed with the shapes fashions and counterfeites of their bodies Churches houses trées Plantes and fruites c. The 11. Chapter Of the coast of India that is from Goa to the cape de Comoriin and the furthest corner of the lande which is called the coast of Malabar THe coast of Malabar beginneth from Cape de Ramos which lyeth frō Goa Southwardes ten myles and endeth at the Cape de Comoriin in time past called Corii which is 100. and 7. or 8. miles whereon lie the places hereafter following which are inhabited by the Portingals and kept with fortresses first from the said Cape de Ramos to the fortresse of Onor are tenne miles lying full vnder 14. degrées and is inhabited by the Portingalles There is great quantity of Pepper for that they are able euery yeare to lade a shippe with 7. or 8. thousand Quintalles of Pepper Portingal waight it is the best and fullest berries in all Malabar or India This land belongeth to a Quéene named Batycola which is a towne not farre from thence inwardes wherin she kéepeth her Court it is she that selleth the Pepper and deliuereth it vnto the Marchantes Factors that lie in Onor but they must alwaies deliuer their money sixe monthes before they receyue their Pepper otherwise they get it not then she deliuereth the Pepper which by one of the Factors is receyued and laid vp within the fortresse till the shippes of Portingall come thether to take in their lading of Pepper There is likewise much Ryce This fortresse is not much frequented but onely in the time of lading of their Pepper which within fewe yeares hath béene vsed to be laden there for before they vsed not to lade any in that place From Onor to the towne of Barselor are 15. miles and lyeth vnder 13. degrées it is also inhabited by Portingalles as Onor is there is great store of Ryce Pepper from Barselo◠to Mangalor are 9. miles and lyeth vnder twelue degrées and a halfe which also is a fortresse inhabited as the others are by Portingals and hath great store of Pepper and Ryce From Mangalor to Cananor are 15. myles which lyeth right vnder 11. degrées and a halfe This is the best fortresse that the Portingalles haue in all Malabar and there is much Pepper The Malabars without the fortresse haue a village with many houses therein built after their manner wherein there is a market holden euery day in the which all kindes of victuailes are to be had which is wonderfull altogether like the Hollanders markets There you find Hennes Egges Butter Hony Indian Oyle and Indian figges that are brought from Cananor which are very great and without exception the best in all India of the which sorts of victuailes with other such like they haue great quantities also very faire and long mastes for shippes such as better cannot be found in all Norway and that in so great numbers that they furnish all the countries rounde about them It is a very gréene and pleasant lande to beholde full of faire high trées and fruitfull of all thinges so is the whole coast from Malabar all along the shore Among these Malabars the white Mores do inhabite that beléeue in Mahomet and their greatest traffique is vnto the redde sea although they may not doe it neyther any other Indian without the Portingalles pasport otherwise the Portingals army which yearly saileth along the coasts to kéepe them cleare from sea rouers for the safetie of their marchants finding them or any other Indian or nation whatsoeuer at sea without a pasport woulde take them for a prize as oftentimes it happeneth that they bring shippes from Cambaia Malabar or from the I le of Sumatra and other places that traffique to the redde sea These Mores of Cananor kéepe friendshippe with the Portingalles because of the fortresse which holdeth them in subiection yet couertly are their deadly enemies and secretly contribute and pay great summes of money to the other Malabars to the ende that they shoulde mischiefe and trouble the Portingalles by all the meanes they can deuise whose forme and images do follow after those of Goa and Malabar From Cananor to Calecut are 8. miles which lyeth full vnder 11. degrées This towne of Calecut hath in times past béene the most famous Towne in all Malabar or India and it was the chiefe towne of Malabar where the Samoriin which is the Emperour holdeth his Court but because the Portingalles at their first comming and discouering of India were oftentimes deceyued by him they resorted to the King of Cochin who as then was subiect to the Samoriin being of small power But when the Portingals began to prosper in their enterprise and to get possession in the countrey and so became maisters of the sea Calecut beganne to decay and to lose both name and traffique and nowe at this time it is one of the townes of least account in all Malabar and Cochin to the contrarie their King being very rich and richer then the Samoriin so that now he careth noe for him by means of the fauour and help he findeth at the hands of the Portingalles From Calecut to Cranganor are tenne myles and lyeth vnder tenne degrées and a halfe there the Portingalles haue a Fortresse From Cranganor to Cochin are tenne miles and lyeth not full vnder tenne degrées The towne of Cochin is inhabited by Portingals and naturall borne Indians as Malabars and other Indians that are christened it is almost as great as Goa very populous and well built with faire houses Churches and cloysters and a fayre and most pleasant Riuer with a good channell and a hauen a little beyonde the towne towards the land runneth a small riuer or water where sometimes men may passe ouer dry footed on the further side whereof lyeth a place called Cochin Dacyma and it is aboue Cochin which is in the iurisdiction of the Malabars who as yet continue in their owne religion there the King kéepeth his Court It is very full and well built with houses after the Indian manner and
hath likewise a market euery day where all kind of thinges are to be bought as in Cananor but in greater quantities The land of Cochin is an Island and it is in many places compassed about and through the Isle with small Riuers Right ouer against Cochin Northwarde lyeth an other Island called Vaypiin which is likewise compassed about with water like the fortresse of Cranganor all these landes and Countries are low and flat land like the Countrie of Holland but haue no ditches nor downes but onely the flat shore vpon the Sea side and within the shore the Strand of the ryuer nor without any high ground or shelters and so it still continueth The Countrie is verye great and pleasant to behold full of woodes and trees it hath also woods of Cinamon trées which are called Canella de Maâ—es that is wilde CinamoÌ„ which is not so good as the Cinamon of Seyloâ— for when the Cinamon of Seyloâ— is worth 1â—0 Pardaâ—eÌ„ or Dollers that Cinamon is worth but 5 or 3â— Pardaâ—wen and is likewise forbidden â—o bee carried into Portingale notwithstanding There is euery yeare great quantitie thereof shipped but it is entred in the Custome bookes for Cinamon of Seylon whereby they pay the King his full Custome for the best Cochin hath also much Pepper and can euery yeare lade two ships full other shippes lade along the coast at the fortresse aforesaid vse to come vnto Cochin after they haue discharged all their Portingal wares and Marchandises at Goa and thether also come the Factors and Marchants and lade their wares as in my Voyage homewards I will declare Without Cochin among the Malabares there dwelleth also diuers Moores that belieue in Mahomet and many Iewes that are very rich and there liue fréely without being hindred or impeached for their religion as also the Mahometans with their churches which they cal Mesquiten the Bramanes likewise which are the Spiritualitie of the Malabares Indians haue their Idols and houses of Diuels which they call Pagodes These thrée nations doe seuerally holde maintaine their lawes and ceremonies by them selues and liue friendly and quietly together kéeping good pollicie and iustice each nation béeing of the Kinges counsell with his Naires which are his gentilmen and nobilitie so that when any occasion of importaunce is offered then al those thrée nations assemble themselues together wherein the King putteth his trust of the which King and his Naires Malabare and Baâ—amenes c. with their maners customes aparrell Idols pagodes and ceremonies in an other place I will shewe you more at large together with their pictures couÌ„terfetes and for this time I cease to speake thereof wil procéede in the description of the coasts which I haue already beguÌ„ From Cochin to Coulon are 12. myles and lyeth vnder 9 degrées it is also a fortresse of the Portingals where likewise euery yere they lade a ship with pepper from Couâ—on to the cape de Comori are 20. myles this corner lieth full vnder 7. degrées a half which is the end of the coast of Malabar of India The 12. Chapter The description of the kings the diuision of the land and coast of Malabar and their originall TO vnderstand the gouernment and diuisions of the laÌ„d of Malabar you must know that in tymes past but long sithence the whole land of Mâ—labar was ruled by one King being then but one kingdome where now are manie and as the Malabares saye the last king that ruled the whole couÌ„try alone was named Sarama Perimal in whose time the Arabian Mahometanes much frequented the couÌ„trie of Malabar because of the great trafique of Spices which as then were sent from thence to the red sea and so conueyed into all places of the world Those Arabians by their subtilties delt in such manner with the King that they perswaded him and many of his couÌ„try to beleue in the lawe of Mahomet as they did almost throughout whole India and other orientall couÌ„tries and Ilands which is one of the principalest occasions why they can hardly be brought to beleue in Christ but rather seeke by all meanes to ouerthrowe the Christians and to fight against the Portingales in those countries as in the Portingal Chronicles and Histories of the first discouery and conquest of the Indies is at large described But returning to our matter this King Sarama was so déepely rooted in his new sect of Mahometes law that he determined in him selfe to leaue his kingdome and goe on pilgrimage to Mecca to see Mahomets graue and there to ende his lyfe in so holy an exercise thinking thereby to be saued which in the end he brought to effect And because he had neither childreÌ„ nor heyres to possesse his kingdome he deuided the same among his chiefest best seruaÌ„ts frieÌ„ds giuing to one Cochin to an other Cananor to the third Chale to the fourth Coulon c. and so he delt with all the other places of his dominions making euery one of those places a kingdome The town of Calicut he gaue to one of his best beloued seruaÌ„ts together with the title of Samoriin which is as much to say as Emperour and chief of al the rest and commanded that they should all acknowledge him as their Soueraigne and they his vassalles and at his commandement whereby euen vntill this time the King of Calicut holdeth the name of Samoriin with the commandement and authoritie ouer the other kings throughout the whole countrie of Malabar by such means as you haue heard before which done the king weÌ„t on pilgrimage to Mecca wher he ended his dayes and the Samoriin with the other kings continued each man in his newe kingdome whose successors vntill this day doe continue and gouerne the said kingdomes onely the Samoriin is somewhat imbased and the king of Cochin exalted since the Portingals ariued in the Indies as it is said before These Malabares are excellent good soldiours and goe naked both men and women onely their priuy members couered and are the principallest enemies that the Portingals haue and which doe them most hurt and although commonlie they haue peace with the Samoriin and hold so many forts vpon the land as you haue heard before yet the Malabares haue their hauens as Chale Calicut Cunhale Panane and others from whence with boates they mak roads into the sea and doe great mischief making many a poore merchant The Samoriin likewise when the toy taketh him in the head breaketh the peace that by the counsell of the Mahometanes who in all things are enemies to the Christians séeke to do them mischief and because of the Malabares inuasions the Portingall fléet is forced euery yeare to put forth of Goa in the summer-time to kéepe the coast and to preserue the merchants that trauaill those couÌ„tries from y e Malabars for that the most traffique in India is in Foists like galleyes wherein they traffique from the one place to the other which is
whole kingdome are fairely paued and all along euen and smoth till you come to the hils and the entrance or Frontespicio of the Citties verie costly and workmanly built with thrée or foure Gates one by the other all stricken ouer full of Iron and the stréetes within the Citties and Villages very fairely paued and playned as straight as a line and euen in breadth so that if you stand at the ende of a stréete you may sée to the other ende by reason of the straightnes bee it neuer so long At the end of euery stréete are certaine Vaults made wherein are wares and marchandises of all costly things and prices that man can wish or desire Ouer euery stréete there are diuers Arches made of stone verie finely and cunningly Painted which are set in the stréetes because that all their feasâ—es pâ—ayes and spirituall ceremonies are done by night and then those Arches are placed full of lights and Torches which maketh a goodly shew The houses commonly haue three doores to goe in at whereof that in the middle is the greatest the other somewhat lesse they are commonly low without Sellers vnder grouÌ„d but within very large and broad with great roomes and faire Gardens full of all pleasure and delight The towne where the King is resident is called Xuntien or Taybjin which some men call Quinzay this name Xuntien is as much to say in Chinish speach as heauenly Cittie and lyeth in the Prouince of Paguia of the greatnesse whereof they write wonders for they affirme that within the walles the Towne is as long from the one end to the other as a man on horsebacke may ride vpon a day with a thousand other wonders which for breuitie I omit In this town the King hath his Palace with all pleasures that may or can bee deuised both for him selfe his wiues and his Courte His wiues little or neuer goe abroad so that they are seldome or neuer séene thereby to maintaine their authoritie as also fearing that any mischiefe should happen vnto them there are not in all the countrie any Noble men of name or title as Earles Dukes Viscounts or such like nor that haue any vassales commandements Iurisdictions or proprieties to themselues other then such as are giuen by the King and when they die it returneth againâ— vnto the King and if hee wil he may take it from the children but commonly hee letteth them haue it so they be fit for the place and that with a new giâ—â— and bond to serue the King In all the principall townes where the Viceroyes or Gouernours hold their states there hangeth a picture of the King couered with a Curtaine of cloth of Golde whereunto all Officers Commaunders Loiâ—as Mandorijns c. dayly resort and doe it all reuerence and honour such as belongeth to a King of such estate as if the King himselfe were there in person the Kings title is King and Lord of the world and Sonne of heauen No man throughout all China may beare any weapons nor yet haue them in his house but such as are appointed thereunto and receiue the Kings pay as souldiers whose children succeed their fathers in their places The men of China are great and cunning workemen as may well bee séene by the workmanship that commeth from thence They make and vse waggons or Cartes with sayles like Boates and with wheeles so subtilly made that being in the fielde they goe and are driuen forwards by the winde as if they were in the water they are verie wittie in buying and selling All the traders that kéepe shops haue a Table hanging at their doores wherein is written euery kind of ware they haue to sell All Officers or handicrafts men haue either of them a streete alone and dwell by themselues and their children must vse the like trade after their Fathers deaths whether they were souldiers Iustices or Gouernours When any man is very rich he is licenced not to work notwithstanding he must keepe workmen and keepe open shoppe the money that is vsed throughout all China is Golde and Siluer vnstamped but cut in smal peeces to the value of a penie and so receiued by waight and in like sorte payed Also all wares of what sort soeuer they bee not so much as Hennes Géese Fish and such like but are bought and solde by waight They haue one wife which they call their lawfull wife and as many other as they can well maintaine the sonne of the lawfull wife inheriteth most part of their goods and that which remaineth is equally deuided among the other children they marrie with whome they will except it be with their Sisters or their Vncles children The Bridegrome before he fetcheth the Bride home to his house must indowe her with certaine goods which he giueth to the Bride her selfe and shee giueth them vnto her Father or mother in recompence of their charges for bringing her vp in her youth which done shee goeth home with the Bridegrome and the parents may do what they wil with that which they haue so receiued for their daughters dowrie and spend it as they thinke good and what remaineth thereof after the parents are deade returneth againe vnto the daughter whose husband gaue the same for his wife so that he which hath most daughters is the richest as it is reported by the Pictures heereafter following you may see the forme and manner of those of Câ— as wel men as women as also of the Mandorijns and mightie men or Gouernours as they are carried in the stréetes and goe to sport vppon the ryuers where they refresh themselues with all kinds of dainties The men of China haue manie spéeches but in writing they vnderstand each other in euerie place for they write euerie thing with figures and characters whereof their alphabets are sundrie and innumerable these figures with their paper of diuers colours as also penne and inke you may see at D. Paludanus house so that men had need of a good memorie and long exercise before they can vnderstand them all and read what it is which is the cause that among them such as are learned are so much esteemed Their paper is like that of Auroâ—a but not so white but thinner and smoother they make also of all colors which is very saire they write with pennes of Reedes wherein there sticketh a pensell such as Painters vse Printing painting gun-powder with the furniture thereto belonging haue beene vsed in China many hundreth yeares past and very common so that it is with them out of memorie when they first began Their Chronicles shewe that their first king being a great Nigromancer who raigned manie thousand yeares past did first inuent great ordinance with all things belonging thereunto Printing is likewise very auncient with them for that there are bookes found in those countries of China which were printed at the least fiue or sixe hundreth yeares before printing was in vse with vs in Europe so that it is not founde when
vsed in India for many medicines caryed into al places Galanga is a roote with many â—nots being red both inwardly outwardly the knottes running about it smelling well and sharpe of taste for sauor and fashion like the Cyperus roote wherefore by some men it is esteemed for Cyperus of Babylon It heateth and dryeth in the third degree therefore it comforteth the stomake and driueth away the payne thereof proceeding of cold and windynesse It healeth a stincking breath it helpeth the beating of the hart being drunk with the iuyce of the leafe of Weghe it healeth the Colicke proceeding from wind it is good also against the windines of the Mother it increaseih lust heateth the kidneyes and euerie morning eating a little therof it healeth the head-ache which hath long indured Of these and such like herbes there are manie in India and in the Orientall parts the names and properties whereof are to mee vnknowne because they are not so common nor knowne among the meaner sort of people but onlie by Physitians Apothecaries and Herbalistes therefore I haue onlie spoken of such as are commonlie knowne and daylie vsed And this shall suffice for Spices Drugges and medicinable herbes The 84. Chapter Of all sorts of Pearles both great and small and of precious stones as Diamantes Rubies Topaces Saffires and other such like stones called Oriental stones and of the Bezers stone which is good against poyson and such like diseases and in what manner and place they are found PEarles by the Portingales are called Perolas that is such as are great and the small Alioffar in Latin Margaritas in Arabia Lulu in Persia and India Motu and in Malabar Mutiu The principall and the best that are found in all the Orientall countries and the right Orientall pearles are some betwéene Ormus and Bastora in the straights or Sinus Persicus in the places called Bareyn Catissi Iulfar Camaron other places in the said Sinus Persicus from whence they are brought into Ormus The King of Portingale also hath his Factor in Bareyn that stayeth there onlie for the fishing of pearles There is great trafficke vsed with them as well in Ormus as in Goa There are also other fishings for pearle as betwéene the Iland of Seylon and the Cape de Comriin where great numbers are yearelie found for that the King of Portingale hath a captaine there with certaine soldiers that looketh vnto it they haue yearlie at the lest aboue 3 or 4 thousaÌ„d duckers y t liue onlie by fishing for pearles and so maintaine themselues whereof euerie yeare many are drowned or deuoured by y e fishes called Tubarones or Hayen whereof I haue alreadie made meÌ„tion these pearls are not so good nor so much esteemed as the pearles of Ormus and are of a lower price which they know likewise how to discerne at the first sight There are also pearles found by the Iland of Borneo and the Iland of Aynon on the coast of Cauchinchina but those of Ormus surpasse them all They are fished for by dukers that diue into the water at the least 10 12 and 20 fadome déepe They grow in Oysters but the great pearls are found in the Oysters that swimme aloft and the smallest called Alioffar are commonly in the bottome of the sea The duckers are naked hauing a basket bound at their backes which being at the bottome to make the more hast they rake full of Oysters and durt together and then ryse vp againe and throwe them into boates that lie readie for the purpose with men in them which presentlie take the Oysters and lay them on land to drie where with the heate of the Sunne they open of themselues and so they find the pearles of Alioffar in the fish and when they haue made an end of fishing for that day all the Fishers with the Captaine Soldiers laborers and Watchmen for the King goe together and taking all the pearles that are caught that day they diuide them into certaine heapes that is one part for the King an other part for the Captaine and Soldiers the third part for the Iesuites because they haue their Cloyster in that place and brought the Countrie first vnto the Christian Faith and the last part for the Fishers which is done with great Iustice and equalitie This fishing is done in Summer tyme and there passeth not any yeare but that diuers Fishers are drowned by the Cape de Comoriin which is called the Kings fishing and manie deuoured by Fishes so that when the fishing is done there is a great and pitifull noyse and cry of women and Children heard vpon the land for the losse of their husbands and friends yet the next yeare they must to the same worke againe for that they haue no other meanes to liue as â—lso for that they are partlie compâ—lled thereunto by the Portingales but most part are content to doe it because of the gaine they get thereby after all the danger is past They finde sometimes many and sometimes but a few Pearles in one oyster sometimes two hundred graines and more The oysters that haue the best Pearles in them are thinne and white which the Indians call Cheripo wherof they make spoones and cups to drink in The Pearles are sold by siues which are made of mettell driuen into thin plate for that purpose whereof the holes are round There are many sorts of these siues the first hath small holes and the Pearles that passe through them are at one price the next siue hath greater holes and the Pearles that fall through it are at higher price and so foorth at the least seauen or eight siues The small stuffe that serue for no Pearles they call Alioffar and are sold by the ounce and vsed by Potticaries and Phisitions and to that end many of them are caried into Portingall Venice and are very good cheape To giue the Pearles a faire colour in India they vse rice beaten a little with salt wherewith they rub them and then they become as faire and cleare as christall and so continue There is yet an other sort of oysters by the Indians called Chaâ—lia by the Portingales Madre Perolâ— or in other of Pearle are of the shell fishes that wee call inkehornes which they know how to prepare and make cleane They bring many of them into Portingale to sâ—rue for to drinke in and to keepe for an ornament for pleasure specially those that come out of China and Bengalen some guilt and painted with colours very faire some wrought with branches and other figures as we dayly see them brought thether In India they make diuers thinges of them as deskes tables cubbards tables to play on boâ—es staues for women to beare in their hands and a thousand such fine deuises which are all inlaid and couered with this Chanco or Mother of Pearle very faire to beholde very workmanlike made and are in India so commoÌ„ that there is almost no place in those countries but they haue of them
all the boates being still abord which commonly doe hang at her at the least a mile or halfe a mile within the sea because it is calme This ship called the Arrelikia beginning in this manner to sayle among other romaâ— that stood vpon the hatches there were certaine hennes cages from whence certaine hennes flew out whereupon euery man claimed them for his owne and vpon a Sunday as in such cases it is commonly seene they ranne all on a heape vpon the one side wherby the ship being light of Balast and laden with many chestes aboue the hatches as I said before it swaied so much on the one side that by little and little it suncke cleane vnder the water so that not aboue a handfull of the maste could be seene aboue the water The people leaped into the â—oats that as yet were hanging about the ship which was good Fortune for them otherwise there had not one escaped aliue but by that meanes they were all saued the slaues onely excepted that were bound with iron chaines and could not stirre and so they were drowned God knoweth what riches was lost in her for nothing was saued but some few chestes that stood aboue the hatches which the Duckers got vp and yet the goods in them was in a manner spoyled and the rest vtterly lost by this it may be considered what manner the Portingales vse in lading of their ships and that it is to bee thought that as many ships as are cast away whereof there hath bin heard no newes or tydinges are onely lost by meanes of euill order and gouernment This being so vnluckily fallen out the Marchants vsed all the speed and meanes they could by witnesses to make protestation against the Officers and the Factors of the pepper that they might be punished for taking out the Ballast but they kept themselues out of the way and by prolonging of time it was forgotteâ—â—nd nothing done therein so that the Marchants that had receiued all the losse were glad to put it vp In the same moneth came newes out of Malacca that it was in great danger that many died there for hunger as also that the ship that went from Portingall thether was forced to stay there because they had no victuals to dispatch it away and likewise that the straight of Sumaria was kept by the enemy so that there could no shippes passe that way to China or Iapan This was done by the Kinges of Sumaria that is to say the kinges of Achem and â—or lying by Mâ—lacca vpon the Firme land which rebelled against the Portingales in Malacca vppon a certaine iniurie done vnto them by the Captaine there These newes put Goa in a great alteration for that their principall traffique is to China Malacca and Iapan and the Ilâ—ndes bordering on the same which by meâ—nes of those warres was wholly hindeâ— whereupon great numbers of â—ustes gallies and ships were prepared in Goa to relieue Malacca and all the townes men tasked euery one at a certaine summe of mony besides the money that was brought from other places and men taken vp to serue in the ships for by means of their late ouerthrowes and losse of ships India was at that time very weake of men In the month of May Anno 1587. there came a ship or galley of Mosambique vnto Goa bringing newes that the ship S. Phillip had bin there and taken in the lading of pepper that was in the ship called S. Laurenâ— that had ariued there in her Voyage towards Portingall and was all open aboue the hatches and without mastes most of her goods being throwne into the sea whereby miraculouslie they saued their liues and by fortune put into Mosambique In this ship called S. Philâ—ip were the young Princes the kings children of Iapan as is before declared From Mosambique came the same Galley that brought the newes to Goa the same Galley likewise brought newes of the Army that was sent out of Goa in December 1586. being the yeare before vnto the coast of Melinde or Abex to reuenge the iniurie which they had receiued in the Fléete whereof Ruy Gâ—nsalues da Camara was Captaine as I saide before as also to punish the townes that at the same time had vnited themselues with the Turke and broken league with the Portingales Of this armie was Generall a gentleman called Martin 〈◊〉 de Mello wherewith comming vpon the coast of Abex or Melinde which lyeth betweene Mosambique and the red sea they went on land because the Turks whome they sought for were gone home through the read sea they determined to punish and plague the townes that had fauored the Turkes and broken their aliance with them and to the same end entred into the countrie as farre as the townes of Pate and Bâ— that little thought of them and easily ouerrâ—n them because most part of the people fled to saue themselues left the townes whereby the Portingales did what pleased them burning the townes and razing them to the ground with others that lay about them and among those that fled to saue theÌ„selues they tooke the King of Pate whose head in great furie they caused to bee striken off and brought it vnto Goa where for certaine daies it stood vpon a maste in the middle of the towne for an eâ—ample to all others as also in signe of victorie wherewith the Portingales began to be somewhat incouraged and so they went from thence to Ormus and from Ormus they were to goe help the King of Persia as the Viceroy had commanded them but being at Ormus many of their men fell sick and died among the which their Generall Martin Alfonso da Metto was one whereupon they returned againe vnto Goa without doing any other thing The same armie sayling to the coast of Abex and falling on the Island of Zamzibar which lieth vnder sixe degrees on the south side about 70. miles froÌ„ Pate towards Mosambique about 18. miles from the Firme land there they found the Saint Saluador that came from Cochiin sayling towards Portingall being all open hauing throwne all her goods ouerboard sauing only some pepper which they could not come at and were in great danger holding themselues by force of pumping aboue the water vppon the point to leaue being all wearie and readie to sink which they certainly had done if by great good fortune they had not met with the armie which they little thought to finde in those parts The Armie tooke the shippe with them to Ormus where the rest of the pepper and goods remaining in her were vnladen and the ship broken in péeces and of the bordes they made a lesser shippe wherein the men that were in the great ship with the rest of the goods that were saued in her sailed to Portingall after a long and wearisome voiage ariued there in safetie The 17. of September 1587. a Galliot of Mosambique arriued at Goa bringing newes of the ariual of foure ships in Mosambiquâ— that came
age Not long after shee had done shee came into the garden and as it should seeme had cleane forgotten her former shame where she began both to sing and dance shewing herselfe very merry wherewith all the companie was very well pleased specially her husband that commended her for it When euening was come euery man tooke his leaue and departed to his lodging and when wee were gone wee chanced by our slaues to vnderstand the truth of the fact before rehearsed and what danger we had escaped whereat we wondred much and Francis King himselfe began to be somewhat suspicious of the matter being secretlie aduertised of his wiues behauiour but hee knew not with whome she had to doe nor once mistrusted this Anthonie Fragoso thinking him to be the best friend hee had in all the world yea and that more is hee durst not breake his minde to any but onely vnto him of whome in great secret he asked counsell saying that he vnderstood and had well found that his wife behaued her selfe dishonestlie asking him what he were best to doe and told him further that he meant to dissemble the matter for a time to see if hee could take them together thereby to kill theÌ„ both which the other counselled him to doe promising him his help and furtherance and to bee secret therein and so they departed Anthonio Frâ—â—oâ—o weÌ„t presently vnto his wife and shewed her what had past betweene her husband and him where they concluded vppon that which after they brought to passe thinking it the best course to preuent him Now so it hapned that in an euening in the month of August 15â—â— Francis King had prouided a rosted Pig for supper in his own house whereunto he inuited this Anthonio Fragâ—so and his mother in law who as it séemeth was of counsell with them in this conspiracie and the principall cause of the Tragedy although very stoutly and boldly shee denied it afterwards They being at supper and very merrie at the same time it was my chance to suppe in a certaine place with a Dutch painter whether Frâ—â—ciâ— King sent vs a quarter of the Pigge praying vs to eate it for his sake and to be merrie he that brought it being one of our owne house They had caused him to drinke of a certaine wine that was mingled with the Hearbe Deâ—â—oa thereby to bereaue poore Franciâ— of his wittes and so to effect their accursed deuice for as it appeared hee that brought the Pigge came halfe drunke and out of his wittes whereby we perceaued that all was not well To conclude the Hearbe beganne to worke so that of force hee must needs sleep and the companie beeing departed shee shutte his trappe doore as ordinarily he vsed to doe and laid the key vnder his pillow and went to Bedde with his louing wife where presently hee fell on sleepe like a dead man partly by meanes of the Deâ—â—oa and partly because hee had drunke well About eleauen of the Clocke in the night Anthonie Fragoso all armed and another good friend of his not knowing as hee confessed what Anthonio meant to doe and came to the doore of Franciâ— Kinges house and knocked softly and willed the slaues that slept below to open the dore but they answered him their master was a bedde and that the trappe doore was shut on the in side Francis his wife that slept not wheÌ„ she heard it ran to the window and willed him to bring a ladder and clime vp which he presently did and she holp him in where shee tooke him about the necke kissing him and bad him welcome leading him in by the hand where her husband slept little thinking on the villanie pretended by his wife and such as he held to bee his best friends and to be briefe shee said vnto him There lieth the drunkard and the Hereticke that thought to bring vs to our endes thereby to seperate vs from our loue and pleasures now reuenge your selfe on him if you loue me and presently hee thrust him into the body with his Rapier cleane through the breast so that it came out behind at his backe and being not content therwith gaue him another thrust that went in at the one side and out at the other side and so at the least 4. or 5 thrusts more after he was dead whereby the poore innocent man ended his dayes which done they took all the stones Diamonds that hee had of diuers men to worke as also to sell which amounted at the least to the value of 4â— thousand Pardawes and tooke Francis his own Rapier that hung by him put it into his hand as if they would make men beleeue that hee would haue killed them that in their owne defence they had slaine him but it was well knowne to the coÌ„trarie for that the slaues being below heard all that had past They tooke with them also the childe being of two yeares old and went out of the house but they had not gone farre but they left the childe lying at a doore in the street where in the morning it was found althogh the slaues made a great noise at their mistrisses flight went to fetch y e officers yet they could not find theÌ„ for that night the murtherers went knocked at y e Iesuits cloister desiring them to take them in gaue theÌ„ the most part of the stones saying they had slain the man in their owne defence but the Iesuites would not receiue them although they tooke the stones of purpose to giue them againe to the owners In the morning it was knowne through all the towne not without great admiration and although they sought diligently in all places where they thought or suspected them to lodge yet they could not find them but not long after they were séene in the towne of Chaul which is about thirty miles Northwarde from Goa where they walked fréely in the stréetes without any trouble for there all was couered and few there are that look after such matters though they bee as cleare as the Sunne The dead bodie lay in that sort till the next morning we Dutch men were forced to sée him buried for the mother in lawe woulde not giue one peny towards it making as though she had not any thing to doe with him but holpe the murtherer both with money and victuailes therewith to trauell vnto Portingal and so he sayled in the fléete with vs for I saw him in the Island of S. Helena as bold and lusâ—y as if no such matter had béene committed by him and so ariued in Portingall not any man speaking against him hauing also promised both the mother and wife of Frauncis King that hee woulde come againe with the Kinges pardon and marrie her which I doubt not of if hee once went about it And thus Francis King ended his trauell which I thought good to set downe at large that thereby you may perceyue the boldnes and inclination of the Indian women for there
whereof no newes or tidinges could euer be heard was that they were cast away vpon the sands euen as it chanced vnto him and to auoide the dangers thereof as also to winne the fauour of the King and the officers of the Admiraltie he was the first that tooke vpon him to discouer that way with the ship wherein my Lord the Archbishop sayled and is almost the same way that the shippes that come from Malacca do hold when they saile to Portingall where they sée neither Ilands nor Sandes nor any other thing but onelie the plaine sea so hee came into Portingale certifying the Admiraltie of that new way and although hee was cast in prison for the same cause yet by fauor he was presently released and the Admiraltie perceauing it to be so great a danger for the ships to saile amoÌ„gst the Islands and Sands which they thought to bée the chiefe cause of the losse of so manie ships haue expresly commanded that the Pilots should vse that new discouered way according to the saide Pilots information therby to auoide all danger but that is not the cause of their casting away although many times they are the means of much mischiefe but the chiefe reason is the vnreasonable lading and charging of the ships the vnskilfull seamen and the slacke visiting or searching of the ships to see if they bee fit to sayle and haue all thinges that they want By these and such like meanes the ships are dayly lost as in other places by examples and true witnesses I haue already declared and as the same Pilot that first founde this new way did well approue and verifie to bée true in the Saint Thomas that the Sands or Islands did him no hurt but onely the ouerlading of her wherewith the ship was by the Cape burst in péeces as hereafter I will shew Notwithstanding this way is not therefore to be disliked although it bee somewhat further about but it is a very good way and wholly out of all danger of Sandes and Islandes whereby they doe auoid the Island of Maldiua with other droughtes and sands about the same The 30. day of Ianuarie in the night we passed the Equinoctiall line and the next day after we discried a shippe which we thought to bée the Saint Thomas and the same day one of our Boyes fell ouerboard whome to saue wee made all the haste wee could to get out our small boate but because it stood full of thinges we could not so soone get it forth but that in the meane time the boy was cast at the least two miles behind vs and so was drowned The third of Februarie the ship we saw came close by vs and then wée knew it to be the Saint Thomas wherewith wee made towards it to speake with them but when they began to know our shippe by the ropes that were all white made of Indian Cairo and knowing that we were left behind them at Cochiin and thinking when they descried vs wee had béene one of the shippes that first set saile as also that their ship was accounted one of the best for sayle in all the fleete for very pride and high stomacke they would not stay to speake with vs but made from vs againe which our officers perceiuing did likewise winde from them euery one doing his best to get before the other By this and such like signes of pride the Portingales do often cast themselues away and as it may bee coniectured it was one of the chiefe causes of the losse of the saint Thomas for that they vsed all the meanes they could to sayle well and that they might passe the Cape before vs wherof they vse to brag when they meete at the Island of Saint Helena as if it were done by their wisedome for so it fell out with the Saint Thomas that comming to the cape de Bona Speranza it had a contrarie winde whereby they strucke all their sailes and so lay driuing against the waues of the sea which doe there fall against a shippe as if it stroke against a Hill so that if the Shippes were of hard stones yet in the end they would breake in péeces much more such Shippes as are made of wood and this is commonly their manner thereby the sooner to passe the Cape which our shippe could not beare so that we put backe againe with the winde yet as little as we might thereby to auoide the force of the sea as much as we could but because the Pilot of the saint Thomas trusted ouermuch in her strength did purposely meane to be before vs all thereby as hee thought to win the praise the ship did as it well appeared lie still and driue without any sailes which they call Payrar and so by the great force and strength of the seas together with the ouerlading was striken in péeces swallowed in the sea both men and all that was within her as wee might well perceiue comming vnto the Cape by the swimming of whole chests fats balles péeces of masts dead men tied vnto bords and such like fearefull tokens the other ships also that ariued in the Iland of Saint Helena told vs likewise that they had séene the like most pittifull sights which was no small losse of so great treasure and so many men so that we which beheld it thought our selues not frée from the like danger It was one of the richest ships that in many yeares had sayled out of India only by reason of the good report it had to be so good of sayle being but new for as theÌ„ it was but her second voyage so that euerie man desired to goe and to lode their wares in her In the same ship went Don Paulo de Lâ—ma Periera that raised the siege before Malacca had serued the king 30. yeares in India had obtained many braue victories thinking as theÌ„ to be in the top of his honor and to be much aduanced by the king He also carried with him a great treasure in Iewels and other riches as also his wife children and one of his brethren with many other gentlemen and souldiers that bare him company thinking to haue good fortune in their Voiage there were likewise 10 or 12. gentlewomen some of theÌ„ hauing their husbands in the ship others whose husbandes were in Portingall so that to conclude it was full of people and most of the Gentilitie of India in all our ships there were many that séeing vs in daunger would say they might haue gone safely in the Saint Thomas thinking it vnpossible that it should bee cast awaie Therefore it is manifestly séene that all the works and nauigations of men are but méer vanities and that wee must onely put our trust in God for that if God be not with vs in our actions all our labour is in vaine But returning to our matter each shippe did their best to be first vntill the seuentéenth of Februarie that we got before the S. Thomas being in
wounded both himself and diuers of his men whereby they were forced to depart without hauing any thing there From Tercera North northwest about seuen or eight myles lyeth the little Iland called Gratiosa is but 5. or 6. mile in compasse a very pleasaunt and fyne Island full of all fruites and all other victualles so that it not onley feedeth it self but also Tercera and the other Islandes about it and hath no other kinde of merchandise it is well built and inhabited by Portingales and hath no soldiers in it because it is not able to heare the charge The Earle of Comberland while I lay in Tercera came vnto that Iland where himself in person with seuen or eight in his company went on land asking certaine beastes Hennes and other Victuals with wyne and fresh water which they willinglie gaue him and therewith hee departed from thence without doing them anie hurt for the which the inhabitantes thanked him and commended him for his curtesie and keeping of his promise From Tercera West North West eight or nyne miles lyeth the Iland of S. George It is about twelue myles long but not aboue 2. or 3. myles at the furthest in breadth it is wooddie and full of hilles it hath no speciall traffique but onelie some Woad and yet verie little of it The inhabitants liue most by Cattell and tilling of the land and bring much victuals to sell in Tercera it hath likewise many Cedar trees and other kindes of wood that from thence are brought vnto Tercera and sold vnto the Ioyners which for that occasion dwell onlie in Tercera From S. George West Southwest â— miles lyeth the Iland called Fayael which is 17. or 18. miles in compasse it is one of the best Ilands next vnto Tercera and S. Michaels it aboundeth in all sorts of victuailes both flesh and fish so that from this Iland the most part of victuailes and necessaries commeth by whole Caruels vnto Tercera it hath likewise much Woad so that many English shippes doe traffique thether The principall road and place is the towne called Vitta dotta there the ships likewise doe lie in the open sea vnder the land as they do before al y e other IlaÌ„ds by this town there lieth a fortresse but of smal importance because the inhabitants of themselues do offer to defend the Iland against all enemies the soldiers were discharged from thence which which before that time lay in the fort complayning that they were not able to maintaine nor lodge them The same time that the Earle of Cumberland was in the Iland of Gratiosa he came likewise to Fayael where at the first time that he came they beganne to resist him but by reason of some controuersie among them they let him land where he rased the Castle to the ground and sunke all their Ordinance in the Sea taking with him certaine Caruels and ships that lay in the road with prouision of all things that he wanted and therewith departed againe to Sea Whereupon the King caused the principall actors therein to bee punished and sent a companie of Souldiers thether againe which went out of Tercera with all kind of warlike munition and great shotte making the fortresse vp againe the better to defend the Iland trusting no more in the Portingales In that Iland are the most part of the Netherlanders ofspring yet they vse the Portingales language by reason they haue béene so long conuersant among them and those that vsed the Dutch tongue are all dead they are greatly affected to the Netherlanders and strangers From Fayael Southeast thrée miles and from Saint George Southwest foure miles and from Tercera Southwest and by West twelue miles lyeth the Iland called Pico which is more then fiftéene miles in length It is so named of a high mountain that standeth therein called Pico which is so high â—t some thinke it is higher then the Pico of 〈◊〉 When it is cleare weather it may as perfectly beseene in Tercera as if it were not halfe a mile from thence and yet it lyeth aboue twentie fiue miles from it for it is at the furthest end of the Iland towards Fayael The toppe of it is seene cleare and bright but the nether part is couered with cloudes and with the Horizon whereby the Iland is much spoken of It is verie fruitfull of all kinds of victuals like Fayael and hath great store of woode as Cedars all other kinds and also the costly wood Teâ—xo There they build many Caruels and small ships from thence by reason of the abundance of woode they serue the other Ilands with woode It is also inhabited as the rest are their chiefe traffique being Cattle and husbandrie It hath much wine and the best in all those Ilands and it hath the sauorest and pleasantest Oranges that are throughout all Portingal so that they are brought into Tercera for a present as being ther verie much esteemed and in my iudgement they are the best that euer I tasted in any place And because the towne of Angra in the Iland of Tercera is the chiefe towne and ruler ouer al the Flemish Ilands I thought good to set it downe in this place in the full proportion with all the stréetes Forts and Road or open Hauen together with the hilles called Bresil where the sentinell is holden for all shippes that come into those Ilands al liuely described as in my simple skill I could comprehend and deuise it The 98. Chapter Of the Ilands of Coruo and Flores FRom Tercera westwarde to the Iland named Flores are seuentie miles it is aboute seauen miles compasse it is also inhabited by Portingales and hath no speciall marchandise but onely some wood it is full of Cattle and other necessarie prouisions and lyeth open to all the world and to whosoeuer will come thether as well Englishmen as others for that the inhabitants haue not the power to resist them A myle from thence Northward lyeth a little Iland of two or three miles in compasse called De Coruo The inhabitants are of the same people that dwel in Flores Betwéene those two Ilands and round about them the Englishmen doe commonly stay to watch the ships that come out of the West for those are the first Ilands that the shippes looke out for and descrie when they sayle vnto Tercera wherby the inhabitants doe but little prosper because they are at the pleasure and commaundement of all that will come vnto them and take their goods from them as oftentimes it happeneth Yet for all their pouertie not to loose both landes and goods they must content themselues and Sayle with euerie winde The I le of Tercera lyeth vnder thirtie nine degrees in the same height that Lisbone lyeth and is distant from Lisbone lying right East and West two hundred and fiftie Spanish miles This shall suffice for the description of the Flemmish Ilands called the Azores which by dayly traueling vnto them are sufficiently knowne for that at this time many
builde withall specially Stones for there are great store whereof may bee made whose Pillers and foure square peeces of fine redde Marble stone and there are such great peeces that a whole Church might bee hewed out of one of them Besides this marble there are hilles of iasper porphier or red marble nured with white and other colours which in Rome is called marble of Numidia Affrica and Ethiopia whereof many pillers are to be seene in Rome There is likewise found many grained stones among the which there are that are mixed with iacinths which maye bee taken foorth and separated from the other stones wherein they growe of those maye likewise pillars and other workes be made wherein might bee seene diuers sortes of stones There are also other strange stones mixed with mettall of diuerse colours as copper in shew greene and shining whereof they maye make Images and other princely workes so that want of substance to builde withall is not the cause of theyr small houses for neyther stone chalke wood nor beastes to drawe or carry them is wanting onelie they haue no masons carpenters nor brickelayers that shoulde make thâ—ir houses so that they dwel in little cotages Heere might be declared how this kingdome in the discouerie of the East Indies being in the yeare 1490. and 1491. was by the Portingales brought vnto the Christian faith also howe shamefully the countrey was left when golde beganne to faile I meane not by the decaying or diminishing of the golde but because the King of Congo was persuaded by a Portingale not to discouer the mine as also not mentioning the euill gouernement of the Bishoppes Priestes Moonkes and Friers that were sent thither as beeing sufficiently declared by Odoardus Lopez in his description thereof shewing that they desired not the health and saluations of mens soules but rather glory and rule and to satisfie their insatiable lustes and gréedinesse after golde Yet not long since the King of Congo now liuing hath twice sent his embassadors to the King of Spaine the Pope of Rome friendly hartily desiring them to send certaine preachers and teachers of the word of God to instruct his subiects withall offering to discouer the rich mines of gold that are within his countrey thereby to winne them to bring preachers to instruct his country but christendome hath other matters in hand as to hang suppres pursue and destroy their christen brethren which being beyond my profession is not for me to deale in But returning to the further description of the coast of Angola to the great cape de Bona Speranza first as touching Angola it is by report very populous and abundant in siluer copper and other mettall rich of al kinds of beasts and victualles specially kine yet the people rather eate dogs flesh which they buy and pay dearer for it than for any other flesh their mony is schulpens like theirs in Congo and are like in speech yet different in some words as Spanish and Portingale their king is an idolater or a Heathen They haue as many wiues as they will whereby they haue such aboundaunce of people that Angola alone can make a million of armed men all ready to serue theyr gouernours in the warrs They vse many glasse beades brought out of Venice beeing of diuerse colours which they weare for an ornament about their neckes and armes in their speech they doe call them Anzoles and being hanged on strings Mizanga Hauing passed the kingdome of Angola and the shoare of Kine called Seno delle Vache southward to the black cape or Out hooke the coast stretcheth about 220. Italian miles This coast is all one land like Angola and is vnder the gouernement of many lordes and from this blacke cape reacheth a line Eastward parting the hills called the colde hilles which also in some high places néerer to the Equinoctiall line are by the Portingales called the Snowe hilles which end at the foote of the Cristall hill taking her name from the great abundance of cristall found therein out of those Snow hilles the waters that make the lake haue their beginning by the Portingales called Dumbea Zocche and this cristall hil stretcheth further into the north toward the siluer hilles as farre as Malomba where the kingdome of Câ—ngo endeth beeing diuided by the riuer of Coari Coasting along the shoare from the kingdome of Angola to the cape de Bona Speranza you must passe by the kingdome of Climbebâ— wherein raineth king Matama this country reacheth to the riuer of Bauaghul springing out of the hill called Luna or the Moone and both together running into the riuer Magnice which floweth out of the lake aforesaide behind this lieth Tropicus Cancri and betweene this Tropicus Cancri and the cape de Bona Speranza there raigneth no king but diuerse seuerall Lords This land is compassed by high sharpe and colde unhabited hilles the people that are there liue in the fields like labourers in cotages apparelled in beasts skins wild rough people and not to be credited not induring or permitting anie traffike with straungers Their weapons are dartes and arrowes their meate fruites of the earth and flesh of beasts The ancient Writers thought the riuer Niâ—uâ— to haue her off spring in the hils of the Moone so that many to this day are likewise of the same opinion In this hil towardes the weast lieth a small lake called Gale out of the which lake floweth the Riuer Camilla by the Portingales called the fresh riuer which about the end of the falce cape de Bona Speranza runnes into the sea This Hooke is called the false or vnright Cape because the ships that saile from India to Portingale doe first discouer a great corner or hook of land called Deâ—li Aguâ—â—ie and after that this smaller hooke and therefore call it the Faise Cape beeing seperated from the right and great Cape The space betweene these two Hookes or Capes is 20 Dutch miles which bearing out like twoo hornes make an intercourse or gulfe where the Portingales at times take in water out of the fresh riuer aforesaide and the people dwelling about this riuer are blacke although the pole antartike is there at 35 degrees as also those that dwell in the colde hilles of the Moone so that it is not the heat of the Sunne but the nature of the Countrey that maketh them blacke And bicause this is the greatest hooke or cape and that reacheth furthest into the sea of any Cape whatsoeuer in al the world and very daungerous to passe as al other Capes are as also because that in this place the sea makes a most fearful noyse that the land windes comming downe make the sea thereabouts most rough and troublesome whereby so many Portingale ships haue there bin cast away and because by ancient Historiographers so litle hath bin said therof before and since the Portingales discouered the same thinke it good in this place to set downe the measure and certaine knowledge of the greatnesse
the rest and Bahama which lie al north from Câ—ba and saint Doâ—inicâ— The common opinion is that these Islandes were all one land and ioyned to the great Island and by the force of the sea seperated one from the other as it is thought of Iâ—aly and Ciciâ—ia They lie vnder seuenteene and eighteene degrees the people of those Islands are whiter and better proportioned then those of Cuba and Spaignuola specially the women that are verie faire for the which cause many of the firme land went thither to dwel as from Florida Cachora and Iucatan because there they founde more pleasure among the people then in other Islands and great difference in their speech whereupon hath risen the common opinion that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell beeing women that burnt their right breasts the better to shoote in bowes when they went to fight against their enemies and that there was a fountaine that made olde women yong The men go naked onely when they go to wars and when they keepe any feastes or vse to dance then they put on a certaine cotten garment and other garments of diuers coloured feathers finely wrought with a great plume of feathers on their heades Touching the women they haue verie strange customes for the married women or such as haue had the company of a man they couer their priuie members from the Nauel downe to the knees with certaine mantils of cotten made in manner of nets wherein they sticke certaine leaues otherwise they go naked vntil such time as they first perceiue their flowers and then they inuite al their friendes and make a great feast or banket as if they were married with great signes of ioy and then they beginne to hang that kinde of mantle before them wearing the same as long as they are vnmarried They are in great subiection to their maisters in such maner as that if they should command them to throw themselues headlong from off a hil or to do any other thing whatsoeuer they wil not refuse to do it what danger soeuer consisteth therin not once asking wherefore they should doo it but only because the master commandeth it Here also you must note wherein their kings gouernment consisteth which reacheth no further then only concerning sowing or planting the ground hunting fishing for that whatsoeuer is sowed or planted hunted or fished in any respect is onelie in the kings power and done by his commandement which diuideth those kindes of labours among the people directing euerie man what he should do The fruit that is reaped and gathered is brought all into a place appointed and from thence it is yearely deliuered vnto euerie man according as his houshold and necessarie vse requireth so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees stuards distributers of the common goods of the countrey thinke then I beseech you what a golden time those people had where neither this is mine or this is thine was euer heard among them The only wel spring of strife contentioÌ„ Those in the east parts vsing nothing els but playing at the ball fishing and hunting where neither law nor processe was vsed nor decided where onely the kings will was a lawe and in all things were content to obey it They found certaine red stones in shels of fishes much esteemed and accounted of among theÌ„ which they weare at their cares and others more esteemed of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snailes whereof the flesh is very good to eate of a fire red colour cleare and so like rubies that they could hardly be discerned from them whereof the Snakes in their speech are called Cohoâ—o and the stones Cohibici They gather likewise in the sande vppon the sea side certaine cleare shining stones yellow blacke and other colours whereof they make necklaces and such like Iewels to weare about their necks armes and legs in many places of those Islands they haue no flesh nor eate it not their meate is fish breda of wheate rootes and some fruites The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba died there with eating flesh it beeing giuen them by the Spaniards In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons other birues which build their nestes in the Trees that many out of the firme land and also from the other Islands come thither and load whole scutes ful and take them with them the trees wherein they breed are like Youngarnet trees the barke hauing a certaine taste like Cinamon and somwhat better and hot like ginger smelling like cloues yet are they not accounted for spices among other fruites they haue a certaine kind by them called Iaâ—â—ma both sauorie and holsome about a span and a halfe long like a fig when it is greene the leafe likewise not much differing from the fig leafe and of the bignesse of a willow tree not close like other trees nor hollow like reedes but fast like Elders the leaues beeing excellent good to heale wounds as the Spaniards haue wel tryed To speake more hereof is needelesse those Islandes of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited for because they haue no gold The Spaniards carried many thousandes of them into other places and in seeking for Golde spoyled and destroyed them Hereafter followeth other Islands lying about that coast and first Cuba being one of the principal Islands vnder the Antillas CVba another verie great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by Columbus first foundout and discouered in An. 1492. which he called Fernandinam and Iâ—hannam as also Alpha and Omega as Peter Martin saith and by others the Island is called saint Iacob after the name of the cheefest towne therein which by reason of the great hauen as also the situation therof hath a verie great traffike as hauing on the East side the Islande of Saint Domingo on the West Iucatan on the North the great Cape of Florida and on the South the Island Iamaica all set downe in this Carde It is in forme like vnto a willow leafe because it is longer theÌ„ broad being in length from east to west three hundred miles and from north to south seuenty miles in breadth in some places but fifteene and in some nineteene miles The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19. degrees and in latitude or height twentie degrees It was long time accounted for firme land because of the greatnesse which is no maruaile for the inhabitants themselues knew no other but that it had no ende and also long after the Spaniards comming thither because the people are poore and naked contented with a little and with their own not seeking any further neither caring what their neighbours did and therefore knew not if there were any other lande vnder the heauens then that wherein they dwelt The ground is high rough and sharpe of hils the sea in many places being white and the riuers small and good water rich of golde and good copper the aire temperate
miles to Câ—uo di Camaron which are accounted in this manner first from the great riuer to the hauen of Higueras are 30. miles from Puerto Higueras to the hauen et Puerto di Caualloâ— other thirtie miles This is the second place by the Spaniards diuided into a colonie a dayes iournie from thence lieth Saint Pedro in a plaine field close to certaine hilles being the third Colonie of the Spaniardes not farre from thence runneth the riuer Vilua and the lake in the middle from whence he certaine hard groundes like Ilandes couered ouer with weedes which as the wind bloweth fleet from place to place From Puerto de Cauallas to Puerto del triumpho de la Crus are thirtie miles betweene the which lieth next to Guamareta Saint Iacob and Truxillo From Puerto del triumpho de la Crus to Capo de Honduras are 30. miles and from thence to Cabo del Camaron 20. miles from thence to Cabo de Gatias a dios lying vnder 14. degrées are accounted 70. miles this is likewise a Spanish colonie or towne builded by them and betweene them on the same coast lieth Carthago also a Spanish towne from Gracias a dios are 70. miles to del Aguadera which springeth out of the lake or sea of Nicaragua and is heere called Aguadaco now againe for a time we will leaue speaking of the coast to declare the Prouince and Countrie of Nicaragua Nicaragua DEparting from Fondura and passing the borders of Chiulutecca you come to the Prouince Nicaragua stretching towardes the south sea which is not verie great but rich fruitfull and pleasant but of so vnreasonable a heate that in Sommer time the heate cannot be indured in the day time but only in the night it raineth there for the space of 6. whole monthes together beginning in Maie The other sixe moneths are exceeding drie the day and night being all of a length honny waxe cotton wool and balsam growe there in great aboundaunce and many kindes of fruites which are not found in other prouinces neither yet in Hispaniola nor any other place and among the rest a kind of apple in forme much like a peare within it there is a round nut almost twice as bigge againe as one of our common nuttes very swéete and pleasant of taste the tree is great with small leaues There are few kine but many hogges which were brought out of Spaine to bréede therein The country is ful of Indian villages all with smal houses made of reedes and couered with strawe they haue no mettall yet at the first entraunce of the Spaniards the inhabitants had certaine common and base gold among them which was brought out of other places thither there are many parrats which doe great hurt vnto the seedes and would doe more were it not that they are driuen away by slings and other meanes The Spaniards at their arriuall in those countries by reason of the great abundance of al things called them the Paradise of Mahomet There are many Ginny hennes and a certaine fruit called Cacauate which they vse insteed of mony it groweth on an indifferent great tree and onely in warme and shadowe places as soone as the Sunne commeth vpon it it withereth and therefore it is sowed in woodes vnder trées and in moyst places and al little enough but the trées whereby it is planted must be higher than it and bound close together that they may defend and couer them from the heate of the sunne the fruit is like almonds and being taken out of their shels are couered with a thinne blacke skinne and the piths being taken out it may be diuided into two or thrée partes hauing browne and gray veines but of a hard taste When they make drinke thereof they drie it in a pot by the fire and then bruise it with stones which done they put it in a cullender or potte made with holes mixing it with water and putting thereto a litle of their pepper and so drinke it This drinke is somewhat bitter it cooleth the body not making them drunke and by them throughout all the country it is estéemed for a most pretious thing which they present to men of great account as we do maluesey or hypocrase The maners of this people are not different from those of Mexico they eate mans flesh their clokes and garments are without sléeues they kindle their fire by rubbing two péeces of wood one against an other which is their common custome throughout al India and although they haue great store of waxe yet they knew not how to vse it for that in steede of candles they vsed lights made of pine trée boughes their speech is diuerse but the Mexican spéech is the best and that is furthest knowen for that therewith men may trauell through the country aboue fiftéene hundred miles and is very easie to learne when they daunce they vse a very strange manner for they are at least three or foure thousand together sometimes more according to the number of inhabitants in the fielde where they wil daunce being all together they make the place very cleane then one of them goeth before leading the daunce commonly going backeward turning in and out all the rest following by three and foure together vsing the like apish toyes their minstrels and drummes singing and playing certaine songs whereunto hee that leadeth the daunce aunswereth and after him all the rest some bearing Wayerkens in their hands some rattles ful of stones wherewith they rattle others haue theyr heades al slucke with feathers some their legs and armes bound about with stringes full of shels some ouerthwart and some crooked turning their bodies some opening their legs some their armes some counterfeiting the deafe man and others the blind man some laughing others grinning with many strange deuises they keep their feasts al that day till night drinking nothing but Cocauate The ships that saile ouer the south sea to Nicaragua passe thorow the narow stream about fiue and twenty miles inwards towards the land til they come to a dorp called Reâ—lâ—gio where there are certaine reed houses inhabited by Spaniardes where the ships anker by reason of the good hauen and because of the wood A dayes iourney from this place eastward lieth Legio or Leoâ— the Bishops sea of Nicaragaa standing vpon the border of the lake of Francisco Fernandez as also Granaten and other Spanish townes lying vpon the same lake fifty miles from each other almost at the other ende where the lake issueth into the northerne sea Those two townes are both scarce fourescore houses part made of lime and stone and parte of reedes and strawe Fiue and thirtie miles from Leon lieth a hill that casteth out fire in such abundance that by night they may beholde at the least 100000. sparks of fire flying into the aire many Spaniards are of this opinion that therin must be gold which giueth the fire a continual essence wherby they haue sought many meanes to trie it but al in vaine
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
terra alta that is the last high land you keep the same course along the shore and is in length seauen miles and lieth full vnder ninetéene degrees and ⅔ I set downe this description of the last high land because such as sayle along by the coast may vnderstand that there all the hilles and high landes doe end and from thence forward it is altogether low land and sandie strandes till you come to the place called as Palmerias or Palme trées from the last high land or Derradeira terra alta to the riuer called Rio de Manicapatan the coast runneth northeast and southwest and reacheth 5. miles and to know when you are right against the Riuer of Manicapatan you shall sée a high trée standing alone vpon the sea side and is a very flat land on the sea side hauing a bankie and shallow ground the trée standeth on the left hand of the entrey into the riuer from Manicapatan you runne along the coast East Northeast and west southwest to the Pagode de Iorganate that is the Idoll or temple of Iorganate and reacheth thrée miles This Pagode of Iorganate lieth vnder 20. degrées and ¼ from this Pagode of Iorganate to another great blacke Pagode or Idoll the coast runneth east and west somewhat east and by north and west by south and reacheth 7. miles This blacke Pagode lieth not full vnder 20. degrees and ½ from this blacke Pagode to the riuer of Cayegare the coast runneth northeast and southwest and somwhat northeast and by east and south west and by west and reacheth 10 miles the riuer of Cayegare lieth not full vnder 21 degrees and about 4. miles before you come to it there lieth 5. houels which shew like a Hauen of the Sea built with Cottages in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid there lieth two sandes running a good mile southwestward and at the entrey therof lieth a Riffe running along by the coast for halfe a mile into the sea the entrie of the riuer is 4. fadome déep and you goe in and come forth northwest and southeast the sandes aforesaid as you enter lie on your left hand and there the depth runneth along To know Cayegare a farre off you must vnderstand that when you haue passed the houels aforesaid then Cayegare sheweth like an Iland hauing three or foure trées higher then the rest and a little beyond it standeth a small Pagode and somewhat beyond this Pagode there is a little wood verie thicke with trées which séemeth to bée part of Cayegare and other wood there is none beyond it by the saide Pagode there standeth some Sandie Downes of red colour with some water Beecken from the Riuer of Cayegare to the point called a punta das Palmeiras the Coast runneth northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest by west and reacheth eleauen miles 2. miles before you come to the point of Palmerias you shall sée certaine blacke houels standing vppon a land that is higher then all the land there abouts and from thence to the point it beginneth againe to be low ground and right ouer against the houels you shall sée some small but not ouer white sandie Downes the markes and tokens which you shall finde being right against the point de Palmerias are that vpon the point there is neyther trée nor bush and although it hath the name of the point of Palmtrees it hath notwithstanding right forth but one Palme trée If you fall vppon it by day being by Caijagate and desire to follow your way then saile at the depth of twelue fadomes northeast northeast and by east alwaies with your lead ready in the hand with good care and diligence and being at 16. fadome you shall presentlie winde northeast vntill againe you finde 12. fadome alwaies keeping at that depth till you finde but 7. fadome and lie thereon by night where you shall anker till it be day and then hoise vp anker running the same course of Northeast and northeast and by north till you come to foure fadome and comming thether you shall send a man into the top to know the land This coast reacheth East northeast till you come to a houell which sheweth like a Champana without a mast with a boat following it those Champanas are Caruels of India wherewith they sayle in the sea and along the coast this is the best marke you finde vpon the coast of Orixa and alwaies take good héed to your depthes and if they begin to increase that is aboue fiue fadome then you shal presently turne againe to 3. and 3. fadome and ½ scarse and this is the right course for that if you saile still at 5. and 6. fadome you should in the end come on ground when you see the houell called Chāpana as I said before you shal runne along by it till you sée thrée trées standing together yet somewhat distant each from other which trées are called as Aruores da Conhecensa that is the trées of Markes Right against those trées lieth the riffe of Orixa and being to seaward you shall sée the water breake vppon it on Bengalen side and you cannot sée the markes aforesaid but in cleare weather and if it be mistie darke or cloudy weather then haue the lead readie without neglecting it for you must runne at 3. and ½ and 4. fadome déepe and you must vnderstand that on the side of Bengalen you finde hard sandie ground and on the side of Orixa muddie and small blacke sand I set this downe because I my selfe haue passed ouer it with great ships being past the riffe of Orixa and Bengalen you shall sée the Iland called a Ilha dos Gallos that is the Ilands of Cocks you must runne right vpon it without feare for it is deepe inough and on the other side of Orixa it is all banks therfore I counsell you to goe neere to the Iland of Cocks sayling along by it whereby you shall presently come to a riuer called Rio de Chamdequan which hauing past you shall from thence crosse ouer to the side of Orixa where you shall see a hooke or point of the riuer Angellijn this point of land will lie northward and comming thether you shal alwaies haue your lead in hand and the depth that you shall finde in those places are 3.3 ½ and 4. fadome but beeing full sea it is deeper which wil continue till you be right against the riuer of Angelijn for from thence forward you haue many depthes and being right against the riuer of Angelijn you shall runne along the shore till you come to a riuer called Gilingoa being right against that riuer I wish you not put too farre from the shore towards the right hand for there you finde a sand drougth whereon Bartholomeus Rodriges de Moraiis was cast away with a ship full laden as hee put out therefore I aduise you to keepe on the left hand for there it is deepe enough from this riuer
to certaine high Beecken or downe falles of water you may haue wood to burne and from those Beeckens you must crosse ouer on the other side of Guijnette where you shall presentlie sée 5. or 6. trées higher then the rest vntill you be close to the other side Those trées stand at the mouth of the riuer Chandequā on the east side the depthes you shall finde vppon those bankes are 2. ½ and thrée fadome déepe till you be on the other side for there you finde manie depthes from this place forward you néede no other aduise for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should bee you shall passe ouer the water with halfe flood but I aduise you once againe that if you saile in the morning by the aforesaid riuer of Cayegare then runne along the coast till you come to the point das Palmerias and from thence to 17. fadome deepe frō thence holding your course northwest and northwest and by north this way must be folowed with a Compasse that yeeldeth one strike till you come to 12. fadome deepe and then running the same course till you come to 4. and three fadome and ½ wherewith if it bee cleare weather you shall presentlie see the lād of Orixa but if it be darke and mistie weather then runne no more towards the land keeping still at 4. and 3. fadome and ½ runrunning East for the leade and the depthes will bring you well in and take héede you come not into many depthes kéeping still as I saide before at the small depthes and if it bee night being at seuentéene fadome then runne towards the 2. Ilands and see you anker not for it is badde ankering there and passing by the aforesaide Punta das Palmeiras running in by night you shal then not passe aboue 7. or 8. fadome vntill it be day wherewith as then you may go in if you chance to be there with a small shippe then keepe at 2. and 2. fadome and ½ till you be in the sight of the riffe of Orixa and when you begin to be right against it then runne within the length of a great shot neere vnto for it is deepe enough and from the side of Orixa it is all banks and shallow ground The riffe aforesaid shall bee on your right hande that is to seaward from you and from thence you must make right with the Island A Ylha dos Gallos or if you will to the point of the Riuer Angelijn where you may freely sayle for there you shall find two and a halfe and thrée fadome déepe but it must bee with a small ship as I said before The 13. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Aracan which is the same way that you hold to Porto Grande or the great hauen lying in the countrie of Bengalen SAyling from India or Cochijn to the hauen of Aracan you must holde your course to the Islande of Seylon in manner aforesaid as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno running so to the pointe or ende of the sandes or droughtes lying full vnder 6. degrées and vppon the point of the lande which runneth East and West comming by this point or hooke you shall from thence put off from the land running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward to come out vnder the Islande and then let your course be Northeast and Northeast by North till you be vnder 12. degrées and that Manacosta be southwest from you and from thence you shall runne Northeast till you be almost vnder 20. degrées which is the height of Aracan and if then you sée no land you shall runne East vnto Aracan vnder the same height of 20. degrées thrée or four miles from the land there lyeth a riffe whervpon the water breaketh and at low water is vncouered it is in greatnesse and length about the length of seuen ships both waies and when you sée it you must take heed of it and goe no nearer then the shotte of a great peece The hauen of Aracan lyeth vnder 20. degrees and being fiue or sixe miles to seawarde from it you shall there find twentie fadome deepe sandie grounde and being at 19. degrees and ½ toward the lande you shall find deepe muddie ground at the least 6 miles from the shore and being but three or four miles from the land thirtie fadome déepe muddy ground you must be careful at 19 degrees and ½ not to runne in with the lande but do as I said before The 14. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Martauan lying in the kingdome of Pegu with the situation of the coastes SAyling from India to Martauan or to y e kingdome of Pegu you shall hold your course till you be past the Island of Seylon as they doe that saile to Bengalen and being about the Island you shal make to the Ilands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon whereof the first Iland lyeth south vnder 11. degrées and the furthest land in the North vnder 14. degrées you runne on the East side of them Northeast and Southwest from the Ilands d' Andemaon to the firme lande are aboue 60. miles and running to Andemaon you shall vse all the meanes you can to passe by them vpon the North side and being past you must as I said before make towardes Martauan which lyeth vnder 16. degrees and when you are at 14. degrées you shall make with the lande but better at 13. degrees because of the creeke or winding in of Martauan where you finde a very strong streame alwayes drawing Northwest and if you make with the lande being at 14. degrees you shall sée many Islands which you may freely passe close by for it is all ouer very deepe for there it is 12. and 13. déepe muddie ground close by the shore besides the Island Pulo Comudo which is about 6. or 7. miles from the hauen of Martauan betweene this Island and the firme lande there lyeth many riffes notwithstanding if you chance to fall betwéene those Islandes you shall make towardes the side of the Islande but not too close where you shall find a channell of thrée fadome deep and on the side of the firme land you haue many sands and shallowes passing from thence to the hauen of Martauan being past that Iland you shall passe along the shore where you shall see certaine cliffes lying towards the sea which shew like Almadias which are Indian Scutes by them vsed in y e riuers which cliffes lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towardes Martauan and right ouer against these cliffes you haue on the firme lande a point or hooke of high land and on the North side of this point there lyeth a sandie strand vpon the low land this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum that is in Pegu spéech the Lord of Vegarum for Xemiin is Lord and Vegarum the name of the land from thence Northward the land is high in some places hauing créekes cliffes and Islandes before you come to the
of Enseada dos Ladroins or créek of Rouers 7. miles southeastward This Iland Sanchoan is great high and full of hils among the which there is a crooked hill with high houels on the top thereof like the ioints of a mans fingers when his hand is closed which is a sure and good marke This Iland hath many trées great creeks hayes where in times past men vsed to traffique betwéen this Iland and the Firme land lieth 4. or 5. other high Ilands without bushes or trées which lie vnder one course with the Firme land and the Iland Sanchoan in such sorte that Sanchoan maketh the furthest hook or end outward and from thence reacheth towards the land northwest and southeast so that a farre off it séemeth to bee all one land these are the first Ilands of Canton which lie vnder 21. degrees and 1 ◠from thence to Lamon you saile outward about the Ilands east northeast and from Sanchoan to the land there runneth 3. channels or passages which make those Ilands through the which you may passe with ships the best channel is that which runneth along by the Iland of Sanchoan which is the furthest outward to the sea of 6. and 7. fadome déepe it hath in the entry therof vpon the same Iland a small Iland full of bushes and on the northwest side lieth two great high Ilands which make the mouth or entry and at the entry along by the strand there lieth some small Ilands and hillocks before the Ilands aforesaid towards y e land lieth an other Iland making another mouth or entry betweene this and the two Ilands aforesaid from this Iland to the land is the third mouth or entry through these two entries great ships doe passe with the tides it is altogether soft muddie ground to know the Iland of Sanchoan besides the markes aforesaid or to know if those Ilands lie before or behind you must remember that Sanchoan maketh a point lying outward and that from thence you runne towards the land northwest and southeast from thence further east north east and west south west and marke the course with your compasse and you shall presently know whether you be forward or backeward and if you be so far to seaward that you sée the one coast reacheth east north east and the other northwest then you are right ouer against it by this meanes I found it out for I was the first that marked it and such as know it learned it of me The course from Pulo Caton towards China is thus you shall not saile aboue 2. or 3. mile at the furthest to seaward for the causes afore rehearsed and being past then runne north northwest or northwest vntill you finde an opening betwéene the Iland and the Firme land and as it beginneth to open then runne halfe a strike north north east towards the point of the Iland Aynon and passing betwéene the Iland Pulo Caton and the Firme land you shall keepe the same course because the streame in that monson runneth towards the créeke of Cauchinchina and with this course you shall sée Aynon being 7. or 8. miles to seaward from thence and it may bee that if you come thether at a spring tide or with a slacke winde that you will be driuen further inward when you perceiue the land then marke your compasse and if the coast reacheth east northeast then kéep that course vntill you thinke you to bee past it and if the coast stretch northeast and north east and by east as the Iland lieth then run so till you may wel discerne the land being 5. or 6. miles from thence that from thence you desire to sayle to Sanchoan then runne with the same course for halfe a strike north northeast whereby you shall sée Pulo Tio if you be 4. or 5. miles frō thence to seaward then runne northeast northeast by north and if you be but two miles from thence thē run your course for halfe a strike betwéene northeast northeast by north with this course you shal come to the Iland of Sanchoan shall sée the Iland called Do Mandoriin which is a small round and high land lieth 5. or 6. miles from the Ilands if you desire to put into the Hauen of Macau then runne north east east and by north running to seaward 5. or 6. miles from Sanchoan when you are within 15. or 20. miles of the Ilandes then you shall finde muddie ground at 25. fadome déepe when you sée the Ilandes looke well to your selfe as I saide before you must goe neere them and run along by them about a mile distant from Sanchoan to Macau are 18. miles there are fiue channels or passages the first betwéene the Iland Sanchoan the Island Vasco de Faria about 5. miles broad This Iland of Vasco de Faria lieth nearer the land thē Sanchoan hath a high pointed hil on the sea side a high round houell being betwéene it and the hill very low land so that a farre off it sheweth like two Ilands when you are hard by it and that you begin to discouer the flat land it sheweth like a channell and not farre from it towardes the 〈◊〉 it hath two or thrée small Ilands This Iland lieth north and south with Sanchoan a mile from it lieth a small long Iland without bushes which all along the Iland hath a crooked rigge or backe descending at the end this Iland is called Pulo Baby by this Iland along by the land of Sanchoan lieth a Rocke somewhat aboue the water I here place all these markes and tokens of this channell because it should the better be knowne to such as haue occasion to passe through it which they may boldly do being past the Ilands of the Iland Vasco de Faria the first that you then come to sée is in the fourth mouth or entrie which openeth not because an Ilād lieth right before it 4. or 5. miles forward lie other Ilandes along by the Iland which you shall leaue on the West southwest side all vpon a row and a farre off séeme to runne one through the other but when you are right ouer against them then they lie as I saide before they are fiue or sixe in all both great and little from these Ilands about two miles East northeast there lieth two Ilands close together stretching North and South by these you haue others vpon the same row towards the land all in the same strike or course in the entrey hard by those two Ilands there lieth a great high and round Iland betwéene the aforesaid row of Ilandes the Ilands aforesaid there is a good hold or opening through the which you haue the nearest way to Macau for the better knowledge wherof about three or foure miles further east north east there are thrée Ilands distant from each other which from the land all in a row doe reach into the Sea whereby they lie further outward then
the other which you passe along by so that they ly right ouer against you and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau and begin to put into it it is altogether opeÌ„ without any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed about sayling right towards the firme lande which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence where the mouth or entry is whereby you goe to Caton by the Portingalles called Aâ— Orelhas de Lebre that is the hares eares In this entery it is 8.9 and 10. fadome déepe and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide the streame runneth so strong stiffe that no wind will serue to get vp therfore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side so inward shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water putting to seaward for that you cannot passe betweene it and the Ilands with any ship also you shall finde anoâ—â—er Cliffe vpon the west side being in the middle way séeing right before you a small and low Iland lying in the same rowe of Ilandes in the East as you goe then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chaÌ„nell that runneth to Macau This entery reacheth East and West and may be about a mile broad you must make to that smal Iland and leauing it vpon the North side you must hold your course betwéene it and the other Ilands and so put in alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland where the depth will begin to lessen and much more wheÌ„ you are past it for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground the land lying vpon the south side of the channell is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other which reach east and west and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite and hath a créeke or bay that strecheth Northward at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side betwéene which and the Iland it is drie and shallow ground and before you come to this Iland there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the water to seaward towards the middle of the chaÌ„nell therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker theÌ„ you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen kéeping close to it till you be in where you shall find foure fadome and ½ or 5. fadome déepe shunning the west side for there it is all ouer bankes and sands and along by the point you finde muddy ground this point or hooke is a high land and from thence inward about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of saÌ„d and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses and before you come to it in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe therefore you must hold vpon the east side and runne along by it till you anker it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe The 21. Chapter The course from the Kingdome of Sion to China with the situation of the places DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Sion or Sian you shall holde your course Westward and comming to it you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Bancolea two miles from the land and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fadome déepe notwithstanding you must passe without it as farre aboue it as you can this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest and by west and being against the coast you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid The Coast vpon the shore is low land hauing inward a small houell stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward This low land maketh a point reaching outward lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land which séemeth to runne inward to the sea but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees and comming to the aforesaid land you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east and west inwards to the land hauing manie sharpe rockes there the land maketh a point or end which is commonly called the point of Cuy thetherto the lande reacheth Southeast this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. degrees and â…” and betweene it and the aforesaid thicke land that lieth behind you you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground when you are past or about this point of Cuy then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles and then you must sayle south east and southeast and by south whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands being long flat ful of trees lieth ful vnder 10. degrees which will be on the east side all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward and being by this Iland aforesaid you shall run southeast and rather hold aloofe to the south then to fall to the west because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed towards the sea side Eastwarde it descendeth towardes a black lande which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place lying full vnder 9. degrees ½ This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy southeast northwest and so you must runne 25. miles Pulo Wy are two Ilandes whereof the greatest reacheth North and South hauing a high houell on the South side and on the North side two low houels with a valley in the middle thus the West side sheweth but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde with a small valley in the middle making 2. rocks shewing like two men the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side somewhat distant from the other making a channell betwéene both where you may passe through for it is fayre grounde this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe which you must auoide for all the other places are good and faire being twelue fadome déep close by the Iland and in the greatest Iland on the south West side
inward with that course you shall come to sée the two Ilandes aforesaid lying on the north point of the aforesaid créeke it is in crossing ouer twelue miles as you begin to see the coast on the other side lying before the créeke northwarde the Iland stretching in that sort as I said before being past the point of the créeke you shall run thether being by it you shall sayle without it about halfe a mile from the shore these Ilands end about 10. miles before you come to the hauen of Sian as aforesaid and the last of them are 4. or 5. small Ilands one running through the other along the coast these Ilands haue no trees are of red earth and comming to the end of these Ilands then put to the shore vntill the Ilandes bee right south from you then take your course right North wherewith you shall see the hauen of Sian which lyeth froÌ„ these Ilands 10. miles distant The hauen of Sian lyeth in a low land ful of trees without any sandy strands but altogether of soft muddie ground dirte hath likewise a banke of muddie ground reaching two miles and a halfe southward wheÌ„ you enter first vpon this bank it is hard muddie ground you cannot enter into this hauen with any great ships but with a spring tide and although you shold fall vpon this muddie ground ther is no danger for you must come vpon drie land to put out or in with the tides comming from the Ilandes aforesaid to the hauen of Sian in manner as I said before sailing northward as they ly southward from you being in the night time you may boldly anker vpon the muddie grounde for the next morning you shal find your selfe right ouer against the hauen so that you shall plainly sée it for it is the mouth or entry of a great riuer you shall sayle therein passing ouer muddy ground all with the tides and south winds which will bring you vpwards at pleasure The 23. Chapter Of the course from the hauen of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Tymon Pedra Branqâ—â— DEparting from the point of y e haueÌ„ of Camboia being about halfe a mile or thereabouts in the sea you shal hold your course Southwest whereby you shall see two Ilandes lying betweene Pulo Coâ—dor and Pulo Wy from the which you shal saile about halfe a mile stil running southwest not once putting Southward because of y e strong streams y t run to y e Iland of Bornon and if the wind begin to be calme and that you desire to Anker in the middle of the gulfe you may well doe it for it is at the least 38. or 40. fadome déepe therfore leaue not sayling Southwest ward for with that course you shall come right vppon Pulo Tymon the Iland of Pulo Tymon is great high and full of trées and hath verie good fresh water and if you néede there you may haue it right ouer against it in an Iland lying in a Créeke of the same Iland when you put to this Iland of Pulo Tymon on the Northeast point you shall sée a round Iland and desiring to runne betwéen it and the Iland or betwéen it and the Firme land you may wel do it for you may passe fréely round about in euerie place and comming to Pulo Tymon you shall hold your course South and somwhat South and by West towards Pulo Tynge which is a verie high rounde Iland much like a Doune or a sheafe of Corne it hath some small Ilands lying by it in the same course of South and South and by West you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stonie Cliffe from thence you begin the course to Sincapura running about thrée or foure miles Westward The 24. Chapter Of the course out of the Hauen of Macau in China to the Iland of Pulo Tymon the straight of Sincapura WHen you depart from Macau to y e other coast you must put out at the East chanel if the wind bee Northwest if not then you cannot passe that way but you must sayle thorough the south west chanel which is a good way to passe out running from the point of Varella right vnto the land on the other side of Macau to shunne the cliffe of Belchior Dalmeida and when you are about a Harquebush shot from the other side then you shall runne along to a point of land which is the end thereof where the Iland of Castro lyeth from this point the banke hangeth off for the which cause you shall runne neerer to the land of Castro then to the point of land that you runne not on ground for in those countries you haue most of the shallowes in the land that lyeth on the left hand and the depthes on the right hand with a spring tide at this banke you find 4. fadome and a halfe and being without the banke you shall sayle vnto the mouth or hole running as then to the point of the banke to shunne the Cliffes which will presently bee seen for that the water breaketh vpon them vntill they be on your right hand being out of the mouth of this entrie you shall sayle the course hereafter following and hauing also departed from Varella being a Harquebush shot from thence you must run to the Iland called Do Bugio that of the Meercatte and being ouer against it passe close by it for it is a good way for the north winds which you find there abouts and because the wind on the other side is verie scarce the aforesaide Cliffe lyeth in the middle way of the chanell and you must runne on that side from the north along the coast to the Iland of Castro and when you are out of the chanell you shal keepe Southwest along by the Ilands if it bee cleare weather till you see the Iland of Sanchon and when you are within eight miles of it being to Seaward from it then you haue good sayling for I doe alwaies hold this course and passe well with it being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon you shall runne Southwest for the space of two miles or that you bee 12. miles as you gesse from the furthest hooke of the Iland of the Sands and being there you shal then runne Southwest so long as that you thinke that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon and then againe running South southwest and South South and by West by which course you shal come to see the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto which course I haue holden in this manner with a good and spéedie wind being in sight of the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir and hauing a bad wind not being North then the time will shew you what you haue to doe when you see those Ilands you may goe neere them if you will for it is faire cleare sandie ground at fifteene Fadome from thence to Pulo Cambir the coast runneth
you may well passe running along by the Iland for it is a faire and great Channel or if you will you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them you shall holde the course as I heere set downe Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan or of Canton and fourteene miles North-northwestward from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye also from thence the land runneth East for the space of fyue miles where it maketh an end reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North from whence againe it putteth outward to the East to Macau in this land that stretcheth North there is a small Creeke from whence you runne Eastward to Comaye it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins which are the barks and Lighters of China that carie the Marchandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton three miles beyond the aforesaid small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton which is called Camon it is a verie good entrie for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal to the seaward and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand which you must shunne and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal there is the other mouth or entrie where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins which by the Portingales is called As Orelhas de Lebre that is the Hares eares because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe which may easily be seene from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles you runne along by the land thorough a small shallow Channel which is but a fadome and a half deepe at high water the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd lyeth North and South with the middle of the Channel from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward like Taaquinton and they lie north and South from each other This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make is faire and good muddie ground therein to anker and you anker close by the Iland of Faria in the midde way where it is good fresh water from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd to the poynt of Taaquinton there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground the deepest part thereof is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid and being past that you haue more depthes if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau you haue two wayes whereof the safest is outward through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria running to seaward along by the Ilandes like those that come outward from the sea the other way is East through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria and béeing at the end thereof about foure miles Northeastward you shall see the hauen of Lampacon which is two great and high Ilandes with manie trees lying East and West The mouth or entrie of this hauen which is betweene the Ilandes aforesayd hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe of verie soft muddie ground therefore it is hard ankering there and besides there runneth a great streame at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe right in the middle of the mouth such as desire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water muddy ground on the South part of these 2. Ilands there is an other great high Iland which reacheth northeast southwest betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south the south point of this Iland lieth East and west with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon and the chānell that runneth betwéene these 2. Ilands which reach Northward it is déepe and faire hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon lieth a round stony cliffe and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Iland reaching on the north side east and west and on the west side northwest southeast the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe from this stonie cliffe South-eastward ther is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea al sandy ground with 3 fadome déepe through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon and desire to be outward what way soeuer they go for on the west side it is shalow as I said before Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau al these Ilandes ly on your south side and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands the firm land as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes yet it is all ouer bankie ground for the déepest part therof is but 2. fadome which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton called the hares eares runneth along by the Ilands of the hauen of Macau but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria comming right ouer against the end thereof there you haue an other high round Iland and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward and beyond this Iland there is a row of other Ilands which reach to the mouth or Channel where you passe through when you come out of the sea to Macau and lie Eastnortheast all this Channell or passage that runneth betwéen them out of the sea is faire and good way and there is nothing to be feared but that you sée before your eyes you must run along by these Ilandes leauing them on the south side on the north side hauing the Ilands of Lampacon and when you are right against them northeastward you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land of very white sand to the which point you shal goe for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke the déepest part thereof being along by this point by the which you shal run along within the length of a shot of a great peece and when you are past this point run Northeast and then on the Northwest side there wil be a great high Iland which lyeth
Northeast and Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence Northeast and Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further Northeast and Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
the which and the land you haue a Roade against the Monsons of the South and Southwest windes This entry is of fiue fadome déepe but it is too narrow for a Shippe to wind in it therfore you must bind it fast or cast out ankers both before and behind From this Island two miles West Northwest lyeth another great Island with very high Trées and from the South Southwest side of the same Island there is a good hauen for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds on the which side it hath very good aire and fresh water and the other Island aforesaid for the Monson of Southwest winds is vnwholsome The channell betweene them both is 35 fadome déepe but in the Road you haue such depths as you would desire From this north Island to the land are about thrée miles hauing some small Islands in the way On the firme land West Northwestward there lieth a smal Créeke called Camocon from thence you run to the Hauen lying on the coast fiue miles beyond the Island which is a riuer called Tinay at the entrie it hath foure fadome déepe without any sands or shallowes These two Islands aforesaid of Synogicam where the Portingals vsed to traffike lie vnder 29 degrees and 2 â— and these islands of Liampo doe reach full vnder one and thirtie degrées Northward and are not as the Islands of Canton hauing their Channell faire and cleare without feare of any thing but that you sée before your eies But betwéene these Islands in some places you haue stonie cliffes and riffes lying vnder the water From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides runne verie strong about a third part of the Water at an Ebbe and a third part at a flood wherefore you must haue good regard to the crosse streames that come from the many channels and droughts which runne verie strong and with so great force that oftentimes they driue a man vpon the point and Hookes of the Island when hée would passe by it Wherefore hée that will sayle by these Islands must haue a Pilote that knoweth the Countrey To Seaward from these Islands it is all faire and good ground Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South winde that is from the Road of the Islands or Cliffes to Sea-ward you must alwaies runne close by it and when the Island beginneth to lye East-ward then it maketh a point sticking out and before you come to this Point there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle being inward of a clouen stonie Rocke at the foot whereof it is 20 fadome déepe it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great péece The smal Island shall lye on the North side and you shall alwaies keepe towards the great Island as much as you can for this creeke aforesaid draweth the water to it so that if you were close by it it would draw you in as it happened vnto mee whereby I had great labor and danger before I could get out From this Island halfe a myle Northward there beginneth another great and high Island which from thence reacheth Eastward making a Channell betweene both that runneth in the Sea which Channell from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and cléere but from thence to the point of the other North Island and from both these Islands Westward which is a great space of the Sea it is altogether riffes and Stony Cliffes vnder Water that reach vnto the Channell that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North windes along by the Islands that lye on the land side Therefore when you come from the South Island to Sea-ward you must goe close by it to the point aforesaid lying on the same Island From the Island where you may Winter for the North winds there runneth a channell North Northeastward betwéene the Islands so that it deuideth the Islands leauing some on the land side and some to Sea-ward which channell oftentimes openeth and sheweth it self From this Island aforesaid where you may Winter for the North windes fiue myles further forward in the same course there beginneth another great and high Island of fiue myles long lying in the same course of North Northeast and South Southwest This Island is very populous of euill natured people from the South point of this great Island the length of a Cannon shot Eastward there is a hidden cliffe or Rocke of stone lying vnder the water wherevpon a Portingales Shippe was cast away laden with Pepper and other Spices which is a good marchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries The Riffes and Stones aforesayde reach vnto this Stony Rocke therefore if you will sayle through this Channell or depth aforesaide you must runne on the West side close by the Island From the point of this great Island thrée miles Northeast there is yet another great and high Island and is one of the Islands that lye to Seaward in a row wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built wherefore by the Portingales it is called A Ilha de Varella that is the Island of the marke or token and before you come at it you leaue two or thrée smal Islands on the land side and the great Island of fiue miles long reacheth behind these Islands to land ward and to Sea ward from these Islands lyeth another great Island reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella Betweene these two Islands there runneth a small Channell the whole Channell from these thrée miles to the entery or passage of Varella is thrée fadome deepe at full Sea and that of Varella as also the month of the chanell which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea is all deep In the entery of the Channell of this Island at the foote of Varella it hath a Créeke with a Sandy baye which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward there lyeth thrée Islands all on a row close by each other reaching East and West which Islands also are named after the name of Varella whereby the Channell is knowne This Island of Varella or Chinish Temple lyeth full vnder thirtie degrées and is distant from the Islands Sâ—ongâ—â—â—m aforesaid eight miles From the Islands Sâ—ongicam eleuen or twelue myles it is altogether great and high Islands lying close by each other but from thence to full one and thirtie degrées they begin to bée lesse and somewhat more separated At the end of these Islands there lyeth two Islands together whereof the Channell that runneth betwéene them hath a verye good harbour it is called Lepion they lye close by a great Riuer which is much inhabited and frequented by Marchaunts and other people In this Hauen of Lepion the Iapons doe often Trafficke from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground for that
a mile from the land it is but a fadome and a halfe déepe being hard stones The people of y e country passe ouer it with nailed barkes with pitched or loopes two péeces sailes of réeds or mats an yron dreg with sharpe téeth This coast reacheth Northeast to foure and thirtie degrées where there lieth a great riuer that commeth from Nanquyn within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people both horse and footemen This Island maketh the Riuer to haue two mouths or entries from thence forward the land reacheth North Northeast and by East and comming to that part which lieth Southeast there the land hath an end or point and by that meanes it maketh a great Créeke From this point forward the coast runneth North again after turning again Northwestward Into the which coast those of Iapon doe ordinarily come to Trafficke with the Countrey people called Cooray and there you haue Hauens and harbors hauing a kind of small open péeces of wouen worke which the Iapons fetch from thence whereof I am certainely informed as also touching the nauigation vnto that land by Pilots that haue sailed and searched cleane through it as followeth From this point of the Creeke of Nanquyn twenty miles Southeastward there lyeth certaine Islands at the end whereof on the East side there lyeth a very great and high Island much inhabited as well by horse as footemen These Islands by the Portingales are called As Ilhas de core but the great Island Core is called Chausien on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke wherein there lyeth an Island which is the Hauen but it is not very déepe There the lord of the country hath his pallace and is continually resident Fiue and twenty miles Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto one of the Islands of Iapon which lyeth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North to Seaward sixtie miles or somewhat more This instruction I had from a Nobleman of Portingale called Pero da cunha that hath séene and trauelled through all the Countrey hauing by him all aduise seruing for the purpose as being of great experience hauing arriued and stayed in the Countrey aforesaid by tempest and stormy weather against their wils minding to sayle to Iapon and from thence againe to the aforesaide Island of Goto the Islands lying from this Island towards the land betwéene them and close about them all ouer are many riffes and stones The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilote borne in the lande of Algaine in Spaigne that lost his Shippe vpon the Sands that sticke out from the Riuer of Nanquyn hauing runne round about all this Créeke with a Barke and hée saide that being within when the Sunne rose it came from ouer the land and that from the riuer of Nanquyn there ranne some sands and droughts reaching southward to two and thirty degrées and to the middle way of the Goulfe of Iapon Here endeth the description of the furthest parts that the Portingales haue sailed along by the Coasts lands and Islands of the Kingdome of China being that part thereof which at this day is knowne and discouered The 31. Chapter The description of a voiage made by a Portingale Pilote from Liampo to Iapon in a Chinchea Soma that is a Chinchon ship with the description of the coast of Bungo Miaco Cacay the Island Toca all countries of Iapon ON Wednesday the thirty of Iune being the third day of the new moone in the morning we set sayle out of the northeast chanell of the Island Siongicam with a southeast wind and being without the Island we had the wind South Southeast and ran east and somewhat East and by North about euening we had a South Southwest wind running East East and by South and East southeast with very great billowes out of the south whereby we could hardly kéepe on our course sayling with our sayles but halfe vp and in the morning we ran halfe a strike east and by south and east southeast because the wind came some what ful to the South west with shoures of raine and great billowes that rose very high by which means the waters and streames in these countries run Northward we made our account to haue sailed in the course of East and East and by North 26 miles in one meale tide which was til thursday at noone being the first of Iuly We had alwaies great and mighty waues because it was a Spring tyde all the night hauing great lightnings out of the East and in all the points of the Compasse from North to South On thursday the first of Iuly from noone to night we had a southwest wind running East and East and by South and somwhat East Southeast with great showres of raine without any high wind and being two houres within night the skie closed round about and became close with a great raine wherwith the wind beganne to be calme turning Northward which the officers of the Soma perceiuing being men of China they began to be in great feare for the Chinais doe hold for certaine that in the Moone of the moneth of Iuly vntill it bee 12. dayes old all along the coast of China there will follow great stormes and as I thinke it is till S. Iames day till when they alwaies looke for stormes and foule weather for that I my selfe vpon the same day haue passed two great stormes And touching our North wind y e began still to encrease they perceiuing it put presently Westward againe towardes the Islands and had sayled from noone to that time about ten miles in such manner that as wee gessed we were 36. miles from the land of China and so wée held our course in that manner West and West and by North after that hauing a close skie with little wind whereby we made very litle way On Friday the North wind beganne to blowe higher wee running so till noone and in that Westerly course wée sayled about sixe miles From Friday at noone we sailed with this North wind all that euening and by night til Saterday in the morning then the wind came Northeast then East and so West till noone whereby wee made our account to haue sailed eightéene miles letting the shippe goe West and West and by North and in all that time wée had neither Sunne nor Starre to take the height On Saterday two or thrée houres after noone the wind fell South the weather beginning to cleare vp and so wée ranne one glasse and perceiuing the weather to settle we turned againe towards Iapon being as then in mine opinion about 12. myles from the coast of China and so we held our course that euening and all the next night East and East and by South with a small wind and calme Sea The next day being Sonday at noone we tooke the height of the Sunne at 30. degrées 1 ◠part lesse wée set out
began to haue more depth yet very slowly that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hardly forward but because the water ranne very hollow whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered wherein we onely put our trust at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground and then â—0 and 75. fadome with small thin sand and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde At that casting the ground was somewhat greater sande and because as wee made account wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma I presently tooke in the maine toy and myssen in contrary to the opinion of some Pilots euery quarter or â—atch in the night cast the Lead continually ouâ— and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe sailing so for a little time we saw land which was part of the Island Meaxuma although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto but therein they were as perfect as in all the rest of their iudgements This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande lying lowest to the Southwest and when you are right against it at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a Fortresse it was told vs that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water whereupon the water breaketh This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like womens breasts or like a saddle the other two Islandes or likenes thereof in the middle way are like great Cliffes with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast sheweth like a verie long but not ouer high cliffe we ranne along by the Island holding our course Northeast about two miles beyond it and when we left Meaxuma because the winde ranne Southeast then we ranne Northeast Northeast and by East and East Northeast and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula and being to Leeward we espied a great thicke land lying close by the Island Cabexuma This Island Cabexâ—ma is long flat land verie smooth on the North side hauing a Cliffe this was the last of Iuly and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langasâ—que which is the Hauen place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke The 37. Chapter The right markes of the Island Meaxuma as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of Iâ—pan FIrst when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water you must go right vpon the middle of the Island and seeing Land at that depth it will be a high plaine steepe land but not verie great on the vppermost part thereof hauing two pâ—ps and when you goe néere it you shall presently sée another long land béeing flat and euen on the toppe betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes with many small lying togither which you saile close by about two miles from them this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe and a little further to Seaward from it there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water whereon the Sea breaketh and at the Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe You must vnderstand that comming to Iapon and finding more depthes then aforesaid and séeing land then it is not the Island of Meaxuma but rather the Island called Sancta clara if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome then it is Meaxuma but then it will bée on the Starrebord side The Island of Meaxuma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2 â— Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it he must runne Northeast and Northeast and by East hauing a full wind but if you saile by the winde you must rather saile East Northeast with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexuma which you shall presently sée and if you desire to be put into Langasaque then you must holde along by the cliffes aforesaid to Seaward from them and béeing past those cliffes you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées you must put towardes that point and when you are right against it you shall not presently fall vpon it because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury which commonly you find most certainly in that place and when you find those billowes you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on for there you haue no cause of feare and when you begin to put in then you shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Cauallos so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe then onely to runne in through the middle thereof till you be in the Rode where you must anker hauing foure fadome and ½ and fiue fadome water which is when a trée that is right against the great and principallest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church and you ouer against it then you are at the right place and it is a very good place to anker in but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church you must take care to kéepe on the left hand thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point and so anker as aforesaid And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome as some ancient Pilots aduise you in danger of an East wind then my opinion is that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma and certaine Islands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will so that you may anker there at twelue or fiftéene fadome which you will vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caffury wherby you are safe from the northeast to the Southeast and South béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in which is a verie good channell of ten fadome déepe you néed but passe right thorough the middle and to be the
the Sunne and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead couler and so darke that you may sée it round about not casting forth any beames it signifieth calme weather The like doth the Moone In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red then it signifieth North winds when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cotton being about a finger long then it signifieth tempests and foule weather This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake wherof there are many in y e place In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other till in the end they be northeast then it is certain it will be tempest foule weather If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor in the manson of the South and Southwest winds you find an East winde with great heate and same great droppes of water it signifieth foule weather The 48. Chapter In what dayes and moneths you find tempests and foule weather in the coast of China FRom the seuenth to the eleuenth of Iune often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests From the beginning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule weather for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather the wind neuer staying in one place but running round about the compasse From the 12. of August forward in the whole Moone of September to the end of October all that time there is continually foule weather The 49. Chapter Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China THe whole moneth of Iune except it be from the seuenth to the eleuenth day there is very litle soule weather for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid you haue the windes of the monson with faire and cléere weather without stormes to saile from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly and saile till the 12. of August and all that time you are without tempests In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo you haue alwaies West windes which blowe in Iapon in the moneths of Nouember and December The 50. Chapter A briefe description of the course from Macau in China to Noua Spaigna with the scituations of the countries PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may and hauing a contrarie winde runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course but if the winde be scant whereby you may not holde your course Northeast or Northeast and by North then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land and being there you must run 200. or more miles beyond Iapon and although you holde your course North yet you néed not feare any thing kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West for it might hinder you much running as often as you can Southeast or to Loofeward as also not leauing y e course of Northeast as often as you can vntill you be vnder the height In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds which is a signe that you are farre to Seaward and if you sée them about euening that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes then looke to your selfe for it signifieth foule weather When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land then you shall loose the sight of those birdes and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées and as then knowing the land which will lie hard by whē you see it first you must runne without it and beware you run not vpon the Island called Ilha de Sedros that is the Island of Cedar trées and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse for the Island of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas béeing verie false in the course because the land if it lay by it doth come more and likelier out then it doth towardes the South The Cape of Saint Lucas is a high land and sheweth when you are hard by it as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North and if you néed fresh water within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas there is a great sandie strande where you haue a verie good Rode to anker where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side vpon the Southeast bough without the Marias which is a better course then inward all the coast is faire and good so that you may well runne along by it vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima the marks wherof are those On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward if you be forced to put into it you must vnderstand that it hath a great mouth or entrie aboue two or thrée miles wide wherin you haue no cause to feare any thing but that you sée before your eies you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea where you shall find Spanish Fishermen if you desire to saile further you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land that is to the Hauen called El Puerto del Marques which a farre off sheweth like an Island but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones which shewe like white Runderen that goe in the way you may fréely runne towardes it till you begin to sée the mouth therof and then put into it This in briefe in my opinion is the best course that you may bold in this voiage which I would likewise haue holden if I
way to know the land which you shall alwaâ—â— find at Macau if you find them noâ— in â—â—dia For other necessaries concerning to shippe you shall finde of all things sufficient in China The gaines and profits of all sortes of wares of China are verie great except rawe silke whereby they haue verie little gaine for there they rather desire it readie spunne and although there should bee much solde there yet that were no reason or cause why they should carrie much thither because it should not hinder the voiage and trafficke of them of Iapon into the East Indies for there are many other kindes of wares great store to carrie thither wherein there is much more profit then in silke Of the common wares and merchandises that the Spaniards in the Islands of Lucones or Phillippinas doe buy and yet they buy them much dâ—â—er there then they should buy them in China in newe Spaine they gaine but sixe for one and in Peru ten for one whereof they are sure for that the Portingales that haue gone from hence thither in the ship that came hither haue gained so much by the wares they carried with them that the time that they stayed for their returne séemed to them a thousand yéeres and as they repoâ—t the Viceroy of Noua Spaigna and all the other gouernours and gentlemen of the countrie haue a great desire to vse the trade and doe much looke after it Many are of opinion that to saile that way to Peru it would be a longer voiage for that when you are at Acapulco you must take another way and hold another course of 700. miles long from Acapulco to the Hauen of Callande Lyma which is the Metropolitane Cittie of Peru lying vnder ten degrées on the South side of the Equinoctiall and you should make your voiage in the same yeere and further it is a countrey of great charges and expences whereby you should loose and spend all that you should gaine more in that countrey then in new Spaine because the countrey of newe Spaine is more aboundant in all kinde of necessaries victuals then Peru and therefore your charges is lesse The 52. Chapter The true and perfect description of a voiage performed and done by Franciscus de Gualle a Spanish Captaine and Pilot for the Viceroy of new Spaine from the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine to the Islands of Iuâ—ones or Phillippinas in the Hauen of Manilla and from thence to the Hauen of Macau in China and from Macau backe againe to Acapulco accomplished in the yeere of our Lorde 1584. THe tenth of March in the yéere of our Lord 1582. wée set saile out of the Hauen of Acapulco lying in the country of new Spaine directing our course to the Islands of Lucones or Philippinas West Southwest running in that manner for the space of 25. miles till wee came vnder 16. degrees that so wée might shun the calmes by sailing close by the shore From thence forward we held our course West for the space of 30. miles and being there we ranne West West and by South for the space of 1800. miles to the Island called Ilha d'Engano which is the furthest Island lying in the South partes of the Islands called de los Ladrones that is the Islands of Rouers or Islas de las Vellas vnder 13. degrées and ½ in latitude Septentrional and 164. degrées in longitude Oriental vpon the fixed Meridional line which lieth right with the Island of Tercera From thence wée held our course westward for the space of 280. miles till we came to the point called El capo de Espirito Santo that is the point of the Holy Ghost lying in the Island Tandaya the first IslaÌ„d of those that are called Philippinas Lucones or Manillas which is a cuntry with few hils with some mines of brimstone in the middle thereof From the point aforesaid we sailed West for the space of eighteene miles to the point or entrie of the channell which runneth in betwéene that Island and the Island of Lucon This point or entrie lieth scarse vnder 12. degrées All the coast that stretcheth from the entry of the chanell to the point El capo del Spirito Santo is not very faire Eight miles from the said point lyeth a Hauen of indifferent greatnes called Bahya de Louos that is the Baye of Wolues hauing a small Island in the mouth thereof and within the Channell about halfe a mile from the end of the said Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe when you passe by the point in the middle of the channell then you haue 25. fadome déepe with browne Sand there we found so great a streame running westward that it made the water cast a skum as if it had béene a sand whereby it put vs in feare but casting out our Lead we found 25. fadome déepe From the aforesaid entrie of the channell North and North and by East about ten miles lyeth the Island of Catanduanes about a mile distant from the land of Lucon on the furthest point Eastward and from the same entrie of the channell towards the West and Southwest lyeth the Island Capuli about sixe miles from thence stretching West Southwest and East Northeast beeing fiue miles long and foure miles broad and as wée past by it it lay Northward from vs vnder 12. degrées and ¼ and somewhat high lande Foure miles from the aforesaid Island of Capuli Northwestward lyeth the thrée Islands of the Hauen of Bollon in the Island of Lucones stretching North and South about foure miles distant from the firme land about halfe a mile whereof the furthest Southward lyeth vnder 13. degrées In this channell it is twentie fadome deepe with white Sand and a great streame running Southeast wee passed through the middle of the channell From this Channell wée held our course Southwest and Southwest and by West for the space of twentie miles vntill wee came to the West end of the Island of Tycao which reacheth East and West 13. miles This point or hooke lieth vnder 12. degrees and 3 â— In the middle betweene this Island and the Island Capuli there lyeth three Islands called the Faranias and we ranne in the same course on the North side of all the Islands at the depth of 22. fadome with white sand From the aforesaid West point of the Island Tycao to the point of Baryaâ— it is East and West to saile about the length of a mile or a mile and a halfe we put into that channell helding our course south and south and by west about three miles vntill we were out of the channell at sixteene fadome deepe with halfe white and reâ—â—sh sande in the Channell and at the month thereof whereof the middle lyeth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there the sâ—reames runne Northward The Island of Bayas stretcheth northwest and Southeast and is lowe land whereof the Northwest point is about three miâ—es from the coast of Lucon but you can not passe between